GLAOperator's Manual

Order no. 65155430 13 Part no. 1565840901 Edition A 2016

É1565840901NËÍ1565840901

GLAO

perat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-marks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har-man International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes-sion indicate an instruction with sev-eral steps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you canfind more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Dis‐play

This text indicates a message on themultifunction display/multimediadisplay.

As at 08.01.2015

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-tions and warning notices in this manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.You can also use the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp:

Apple® iOS

Android™

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp may not yet be available in your country.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

1565840901 É1565840901NËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 23

At a glance ........................................... 29

Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 75

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 101

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 115

Climate control ................................. 131

Driving and parking .......................... 147

On-board computer and displays .... 217

Stowage and features ...................... 279

Maintenance and care ...................... 307

Breakdown assistance ..................... 321

Wheels and tires ............................... 339

Technical data ................................... 373

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATICDisplay message ............................ 263

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 19712 V socket

see Sockets

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 236Function/notes ................................ 65Important safety notes .................... 65Warning lamp ................................. 269

Accelerationsee Kickdown

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 58

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 138Active Parking Assist

Detecting parking spaces .............. 204Display message ............................ 255Exiting a parking space .................. 206Function/notes ............................. 203Important safety notes .................. 203Parking .......................................... 205

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 73Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 68Adaptive Damping System

Function/notes ............................. 196Additional speedometer ................... 229Additives (engine oil) ........................ 380Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 56Display message ............................ 246Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 49Important safety notes .................... 48Introduction ..................................... 48Knee bag .......................................... 50

Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 51PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 43Side impact air bag .......................... 50Window curtain air bag .................... 50

Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 144Rear ............................................... 145Setting the center air vents ........... 144Setting the side air vents ............... 144

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 73Switching off (ATA) .......................... 73Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 73

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AMGAdaptive sport suspension sys-tem ................................................ 196Performance Seat .......................... 106

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 231AMG Performance exhaust sys-tem ..................................................... 155Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-skid chains

see Snow chainsApproach/departure angle .............. 183Ashtray ............................................... 290Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 227Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 227ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 313Driving abroad ............................... 313Hiding a service message .............. 312Information about Service ............. 313Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 313Service message ............................ 312Special service requirements ......... 313

4 Index

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 73Function ........................................... 73Switching off the alarm .................... 73

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 228Display message ............................ 253Function/notes ............................. 211

Audio 20Driving dynamics display ............... 200

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 225Audio system

see separate operating instructionsAuthorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized workshop

see Qualified specialist workshopAUTO lights

Display message ............................ 250see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 314Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 154Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 154Automatic headlamp mode .............. 116Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 163Changing gear ............................... 163DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 159Drive program ................................ 164Drive program display .................... 159Driving tips .................................... 163DYNAMICSELECT button (all vehi-cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) ............................................... 157DYNAMIC SELECT controller(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 158Emergency running mode .............. 169Engaging drive position .................. 161Engaging neutral ............................ 160Engaging park position(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 162Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 160Engaging reverse gear ................... 160Engaging the park position ............ 159

Holding the vehicle stationary onuphill gradients .............................. 163Kickdown ....................................... 163Manual shifting .............................. 166Oil temperature (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 231Overview ........................................ 159Problem (malfunction) ................... 169Pulling away ................................... 152Selector lever ................................ 161Starting the engine ........................ 151Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 166Transmission position display ........ 161Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 159Transmission positions .................. 162

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 169

BBackup lamp

Display message ............................ 249Bag hook ............................................ 286BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 66Basic settings

see SettingsBattery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 80Important safety notes .................... 79Replacing ......................................... 80

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 329Display message ............................ 252Important safety notes .................. 327Jump starting ................................. 331

Beltsee Seat belts

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 228Display message ............................ 254Notes/function .............................. 213

Blowersee Climate control

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Index 5

Brake assistancesee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 242Notes ............................................. 380

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 124Display message ............................ 248

BrakesABS .................................................. 65Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 68BAS .................................................. 66Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 380Display message ............................ 236EBD .................................................. 72Hill start assist ............................... 153HOLD function ............................... 193Important safety notes .................. 177Maintenance .................................. 178Parking brake ................................ 173Riding tips ...................................... 177Warning lamp ................................. 268

BreakdownWhere will I find...? ........................ 322see Flat tiresee Tow-startingsee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 31Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 219

CCalling up a malfunction

see Display messagesCar

see VehicleCare

Car wash ........................................ 314Carpets .......................................... 320Display ........................................... 318Exhaust pipe .................................. 318Exterior lights ................................ 317Gear or selector lever .................... 319Interior ........................................... 318

Matte finish ................................... 316Notes ............................................. 313Paint .............................................. 315Plastic trim .................................... 318Power washer ................................ 315Rear view camera .......................... 318Roof lining ...................................... 320Seat belt ........................................ 320Seat cover ..................................... 319Sensors ......................................... 317Steering wheel ............................... 319Trim pieces .................................... 319Washing by hand ........................... 314Wheels ........................................... 316Windows ........................................ 316Wiper blades .................................. 317Wooden trim .................................. 319

Cargo compartment enlargement ... 284Cargo compartment floor

Important safety notes .................. 287Opening/closing ............................ 287Stowage well (under) ..................... 287

Cargo netAttaching ....................................... 286Important safety information ......... 286

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 285CD player (on-board computer) ........ 225Center console

Lower section .................................. 36Upper section .................................. 35

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 230Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76

Changing bulbsBrake lamps ................................... 124Cornering light function ................. 123High-beam headlamps ................... 123Low-beam headlamps .................... 123Rear fog lamp ................................ 124Turn signals (front) ......................... 123Turn signals (rear) .......................... 124

ChildRestraint system .............................. 59

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 63LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 60

6 Index

On the front-passenger seat ............ 62Rearward-facing restraint system .... 62Top Tether ....................................... 61

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 63Rear doors ....................................... 64

ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 59

Cigarette lighter ................................ 291Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 317Climate control

Air-conditioning system ................. 133Automatic climate control (dual-zone) .............................................. 135Controlling automatically ............... 139Cooling with air dehumidification .. 138Defrosting the windows ................. 142Defrosting the windshield .............. 141General notes ................................ 132Indicator lamp ................................ 139Information about using auto-matic climate control ..................... 136Maximum cooling .......................... 141Notes on using the air-condition-ing system ..................................... 134Overview of systems ...................... 132Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 143Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 139Refrigerant ..................................... 382Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 383Setting the air distribution ............. 140Setting the air vents ...................... 144Setting the airflow ......................... 140Setting the temperature ................ 139Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 143Switching on/off ........................... 137Switching residual heat on/off ...... 143Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 142Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 140

CockpitOverview .......................................... 30

Coffee cup symbolsee ATTENTION ASSIST

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 228Display message ............................ 242Operation/notes .............................. 66

COMANDDriving dynamics display ............... 200

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 318

Combination switch .......................... 118Compass

Calibrating ..................................... 304Calling up ....................................... 303Magnetic field zone maps .............. 304Setting ........................................... 304

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 222Convenience closing feature .............. 92Convenience opening feature ............ 91Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 311Display message ............................ 251Filling capacity ............................... 381Important safety notes .................. 381Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 231Temperature gauge ........................ 219Warning lamp ................................. 275

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 27Cornering light function

Changing bulbs .............................. 123Display message ............................ 248Function/notes ............................. 119

Coversee Roller sunblind

Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 121Cruise control

Activation conditions ..................... 184Cruise control lever ....................... 184Deactivating ................................... 185Display message ............................ 257Driving system ............................... 184

Index 7

Function/notes ............................. 184Important safety notes .................. 184Setting a speed .............................. 185Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 185

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 289Important safety notes .................. 288Rear compartment ......................... 289

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 26Customer Relations Department ....... 26

DDashboard

see CockpitDashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lightingData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 250Function/notes ............................. 116Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 230

Declarations of conformity ................. 25Diagnostics connection ...................... 25Digital speedometer ......................... 223DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 159Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 312Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 235Driving systems ............................. 253Engine ............................................ 251General notes ................................ 235Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 235Lights ............................................. 247Safety systems .............................. 236SmartKey ....................................... 265Tires ............................................... 258Vehicle ........................................... 261

Distance controlsee DISTRONIC PLUS

Distance recorder ............................. 221Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 277

Distance warning functionFunction/notes ................................ 67Warning lamp ................................. 277

DISTRONIC PLUSActivation conditions ..................... 187Cruise control lever ....................... 187Deactivating ................................... 190Display message ............................ 255Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 191Driving tips .................................... 192Function/notes ............................. 186Important safety notes .................. 186Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 190Stopping ........................................ 189

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 230Automatic locking (switch) ............... 84Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 76Control panel ................................... 38Display message ............................ 264Emergency locking ........................... 85Emergency unlocking ....................... 84Important safety notes .................... 83Opening (from inside) ...................... 83

Drinking and driving ......................... 175Drive program

Automatic transmission ................. 164Display ........................................... 161Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 159SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 232

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driver's seatsee Seats

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 313

Driving dynamics displayOff-road program ........................... 200

Driving in mountainous terrainApproach/departure angle ............ 183

Driving off-roadsee Off-road driving

Driving on flooded roads .................. 179

8 Index

Driving safety systemsABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 65ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 73Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 68BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 66COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 66Distance warning function ............... 67EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 72ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 69Important safety information ........... 65Overview .......................................... 65STEER CONTROL ............................. 73

Driving systemStart-off assist ............................... 194

Driving systemsActive Parking Assist ..................... 203AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 196ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 211Blind Spot Assist ............................ 213Cruise control ................................ 184Display message ............................ 253DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 186HOLD function ............................... 193Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 215Lane Tracking package .................. 213PARKTRONIC ................................. 200RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 195Rear view camera .......................... 208

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 163Brakes ........................................... 177Break-in period .............................. 148Checking brake lining thickness .... 178DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 192Downhill gradient ........................... 177Drinking and driving ....................... 175Driving in winter ............................. 179Driving on flooded roads ................ 179Driving on sand .............................. 182Driving on wet roads ...................... 179Exhaust check ............................... 175Fuel ................................................ 175General .......................................... 174Hydroplaning ................................. 179

Icy road surfaces ........................... 179Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 177Off-road driving .............................. 180Snow chains .................................. 343The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 148Tire ruts ......................................... 182Traveling uphill ............................... 183Wet road surface ........................... 177

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)Display message ............................ 253Function/notes ............................. 197

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 225

DYNAMIC SELECT buttonClimate control (3-zone automaticclimate control) ............................. 137Climate control (air-conditioningsystem) .......................................... 134

DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi-cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) .................................................... 157DYNAMIC SELECT controller(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. 158

EEASY-PACK tailgate

see TailgateEBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 238Function/notes ................................ 72

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 176On-board computer ....................... 222

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 154Automatic engine switch-off .......... 154Deactivating/activating ................. 155General information ....................... 154Important safety notes .................. 153Introduction ................................... 153

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Electronic Traction Systemsee ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

Index 9

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 58

Emergency brakingsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 84Vehicle ............................................. 84

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 56

Emergency unlockingTailgate ............................................ 89

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 275Display message ............................ 251ECO start/stop function ................ 153Engine number ............................... 377Irregular running ............................ 156Jump-starting ................................. 331Starting (important safety notes) ... 151Starting problems .......................... 156Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 151Starting with the Start/Stop but-ton ................................................. 152Switching off .................................. 172Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 337

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 156

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 310Additives ........................................ 380Checking the oil level ..................... 309Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 310Display message ............................ 252Filling capacity ............................... 380Notes about oil grades ................... 379Notes on oil level/consumption .... 309Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 231Viscosity ........................................ 380

Engine, startingsee Starting (engine)

ESC (Electronic Stability Control)see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 232Characteristics ................................. 69Deactivating/activating (buttonin Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 70Deactivating/activating (exceptMercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 70Deactivating/activating (on-board computer, exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 227Display message ............................ 236Function/notes ................................ 69General notes .................................. 69Important safety information ........... 69Trailer stabilization ........................... 72Warning lamp ................................. 271

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 69Exhaust

see Exhaust pipeExhaust check ................................... 175Exhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 318Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 317see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 109Dipping (automatic) ....................... 110Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 231Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 110Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 109Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 110Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 112Storing the parking position .......... 111

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 281

FFiller cap

see RefuelingFlat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 323Preparing the vehicle ..................... 322TIREFIT kit ...................................... 324

10 Index

Floormats ........................................... 304Fog lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 117Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 374Two-way radio ................................ 374

Front fog lampsDisplay message ............................ 249Switching on/off ........................... 117

Front-passenger seatFolding the backrest forward/back ............................................... 283

FuelAdditives ........................................ 379Consumption information .............. 379Consumption statistics .................. 222Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 222Displaying the range ...................... 222Driving tips .................................... 175E10 ................................................ 378Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Grade (gasoline) ............................ 378Important safety notes .................. 377Problem (malfunction) ................... 171Refueling ........................................ 169Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 378

Fuel filler flapOpening ......................................... 170

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 222

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 378Problem (malfunction) ................... 171

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 338Before changing ............................. 337Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 337Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 338Important safety notes .................. 337

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 303

General notes ................................ 300Important safety notes .................. 301Opening/closing the garage door .. 303Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 301Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 302

Gasoline ............................................. 378Gear indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 231Genuine parts ...................................... 23Glove box ........................................... 281

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHandling control system

see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)Hazard warning lamps

Display message ............................ 264Switching on/off ........................... 119

Head restraintsAdjusting ....................................... 105Adjusting (manually) ...................... 105Adjusting (rear) .............................. 106

HeadlampsFogging up ..................................... 119see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 119High-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 123Display message ............................ 249Switching on/off ........................... 118

Hill start assist .................................. 153HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 194Deactivating ................................... 194Display message ............................ 253Function/notes ............................. 193

HoodClosing ........................................... 309Display message ............................ 263Important safety notes .................. 308Opening ......................................... 308

Horn ...................................................... 30Hydroplaning ..................................... 179

Index 11

IIgnition key

see SmartKeyIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 73Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 277

Indicator lampssee Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Instrument clusterOverview .......................................... 31Settings ......................................... 229Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 218Interior lighting

Control ........................................... 120Emergency lighting ........................ 121Overview ........................................ 120Reading lamp ................................. 120

JJack

Storage location ............................ 322Using ............................................. 364

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 331

KKey positions

Start/Stop button .......................... 149KEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 92Deactivation ..................................... 77Locking ............................................ 77Unlocking ......................................... 77

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 163Manual gearshifting ....................... 168

Knee bag .............................................. 50

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane detection (automatic)

see Lane Keeping AssistLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 228Display message ............................ 254Function/information .................... 215

Lane Tracking package ..................... 213Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 232LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 60License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 249Light function, active

Display message ............................ 250Light sensor (display message) ....... 250Lights

Automatic headlamp mode ............ 116Cornering light function ................. 119Fog lamps ...................................... 117Fogged up headlamps .................... 119Hazard warning lamps ................... 119High beam flasher .......................... 119High-beam headlamps ................... 118Light switch ................................... 116Low-beam headlamps .................... 117Parking lamps ................................ 118Rear fog lamp ................................ 118Setting exterior lighting ................. 116Standing lamps .............................. 118Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 230Turn signals ................................... 118

LIM indicator lampDISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 187

Loading guidelines ............................ 280Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 84Emergency locking ........................... 85From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 84

12 Index

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 230Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 123Display message ............................ 248Switching on/off ........................... 117

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 106

MM+S tires ............................................ 342Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 316mbrace

Call priority .................................... 296Display message ............................ 242Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 296Downloading routes ....................... 299Emergency call .............................. 293General notes ................................ 292Geo fencing ................................... 300Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 298MB info call button ........................ 295Remote fault diagnosis .................. 298Remote vehicle locking .................. 298Roadside Assistance button .......... 294Search & Send ............................... 297Self-test ......................................... 293Speed alert .................................... 300System .......................................... 292Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 300Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 297

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 79Inserting .......................................... 79Locking vehicle ................................ 85Removing ......................................... 79Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84

Memory card (audio) ......................... 225Memory function ............................... 112

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 235Messages

see Display messagesMirror turn signal

Cleaning ......................................... 317Mirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneFrequencies ................................... 374Installation ..................................... 374Menu (on-board computer) ............ 226Transmission output (maximum) .... 374

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 78MOExtended tires .............................. 323Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 366Mounting a new wheel ................... 366Preparing the vehicle ..................... 363Raising the vehicle ......................... 364Removing a wheel .......................... 366Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 364

MP3Operation ....................................... 225

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 221Permanent display ......................... 230

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 219Overview .......................................... 33

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 223Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 148

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 51Faults ............................................... 55

Index 13

Operation ......................................... 51System self-test ............................... 53

Occupant safetyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 58Children in the vehicle ..................... 58Important safety notes .................... 43Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 42Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 51PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 43Pets in the vehicle ........................... 64Restraint system warning lamp ........ 43Seat belt .......................................... 44

OCSConditions ....................................... 51Faults ............................................... 55Operation ......................................... 51System self-test ............................... 53

Odometer ........................................... 221Off-road driving

Approach/departure angle ............ 384Checklist after driving off-road ...... 182Checklist before driving off-road .... 182General information ....................... 181Important safety notes .................. 180Maximum gradient climbing abil-ity .................................................. 384Traveling uphill ............................... 183

Off-road program ............................... 199Driving dynamics display ............... 200

Off-road systemDSR ............................................... 197Off road drive program .................. 199Off-road 4ETS .................................. 69Off-road ABS .................................... 66Off-road ESP® .................................. 72

On-board computerAMG menu ..................................... 231Assistance graphic menu ............... 227Assistance menu ........................... 227Audio menu ................................... 225Convenience submenu .................. 231Display messages .......................... 235Displaying a service message ........ 313DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 191

Factory settings ............................. 231Important safety notes .................. 218Instrument cluster submenu .......... 229Lighting submenu .......................... 230Menu overview .............................. 221Message memory .......................... 235Navigation menu ............................ 223Operation ....................................... 219RACETIMER ................................... 232Service menu ................................. 229Settings menu ............................... 229Standard display ............................ 221Telephone menu ............................ 226Trip menu ...................................... 221Vehicle submenu ........................... 230Video DVD operation ..................... 225

On-board diagnostic interfacesee Diagnostics connection

Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 124Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 25Operating system

see On-board computerOperator's Manual

Vehicle equipment ........................... 24Outside temperature display ........... 219Overhead control panel ...................... 39Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 64

PPaint code number ............................ 376Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 315Panic alarm .......................................... 42Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes .................... 94Operating ......................................... 95Operating the roller sunblinds forthe sliding sunroof ........................... 96Problem (malfunction) ..................... 99Reversing feature ............................. 95

Parcel shelf ........................................ 286Parking

Important safety notes .................. 171Parking brake ................................ 173

14 Index

Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 111Rear view camera .......................... 208see Active Parking Assistsee PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 203see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 239Electric parking brake .................... 173Warning lamp ................................. 274

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 118

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 202Driving system ............................... 200Function/notes ............................. 200Important safety notes .................. 200Problem (malfunction) ................... 203Range of the sensors ..................... 201Warning display ............................. 202

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 246Indicator lamps ................................ 43Problem (malfunction) ................... 246

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 64Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 318Power washers .................................. 315Power windows

see Side windowsProtection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 73Immobilizer ...................................... 73

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 23

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 152General notes ................................ 152Hill start assist ............................... 153

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 26

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 25

RRACE START

Important safety notes .................. 195RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 195RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 232Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 225see separate operating instructions

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 25Rain closing feature (panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 96Reading lamp ..................................... 120Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 145Rear fog lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 124Display message ............................ 249Switching on/off ........................... 118

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear seatAdjusting the angle of the backr-ests ................................................ 285

Rear seatsFolding the backrest forwards/back ............................................... 284

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 318Displays in the Audio display ......... 208Displays in the COMAND display ... 208Function/notes ............................. 208Switching on/off ........................... 208

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 143Switching on/off ........................... 142

Rear window wiperReplacing the wiper blade .............. 128Switching on/off ........................... 126

Index 15

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 109Dipping (automatic) ....................... 110

Recyclingsee Protection of the environment

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 382Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Important safety notes .................. 169Refueling process .......................... 170see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 300Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 301

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 121Overview of bulb types .................. 122Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 122

Rescue card ......................................... 26Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 252Warning lamp ................................. 275see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 143Restraint system

Display message ............................ 243Introduction ..................................... 42Warning lamp ................................. 274Warning lamp (function) ................... 43

Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 161Reversing feature

Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 95Roller sunblind ................................. 97Side windows ................................... 90Tailgate ............................................ 86

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 96

Roof carrier ........................................ 288

Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 320Roof load (maximum) ........................ 383

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 58Safety system

see Driving safety systemsSeat belts

Adjusting the height ......................... 46Cleaning ......................................... 320Correct usage .................................. 46Fastening ......................................... 46Important safety guidelines ............. 44Introduction ..................................... 44Releasing ......................................... 47Warning lamp ................................. 266Warning lamp (function) ................... 47

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ................... 105Adjusting (manually) ...................... 104Adjusting (Performance Seat) ........ 106Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 106Adjusting the head restraint .......... 105Cleaning the cover ......................... 319Correct driver's seat position ........ 102Folding the backrest (rear com-partment) forwards/back .............. 284Important safety notes .................. 103Seat heating problem .................... 108Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 112Switching seat heating on/off ....... 107

Securing cargo .................................. 285Selecting a gear

see Automatic transmissionSelector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 319Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 317Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 229Service message

see ASSYST PLUSService products

Brake fluid ..................................... 380

16 Index

Coolant (engine) ............................ 381Engine oil ....................................... 379Fuel ................................................ 377Important safety notes .................. 377Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 382Washer fluid ................................... 382

Setting a speedsee Cruise control

Setting the air distribution ............... 140Setting the airflow ............................ 140Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 231On-board computer ....................... 229

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 232Side impact air bag ............................. 50Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 250Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 316Convenience closing feature ............ 92Convenience opening feature .......... 91Important safety information ........... 90Opening/closing .............................. 91Problem (malfunction) ..................... 94Resetting ......................................... 93Reversing feature ............................. 90

Sliding sunroofsee Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 80Changing the programming ............. 78Checking the battery ....................... 80Convenience closing feature ............ 92Convenience opening feature .......... 91Display message ............................ 265Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76Important safety notes .................... 76KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 78Loss ................................................. 81Mechanical key ................................ 79Positions (ignition lock) ................. 149Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81Starting the engine ........................ 151

SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 149Snow chains ...................................... 343

SocketsCenter console .............................. 291General notes ................................ 291Luggage compartment ................... 292Rear compartment ......................... 292

Special seat belt retractor .................. 59Specialist workshop ............................ 25Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 229Digital ............................................ 223In the Instrument cluster ................. 31Segments ...................................... 218Selecting the display unit ............... 229

SPORT handling modeDeactivating/activating(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 70Warning lamp ................................. 272

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 249Switching on/off ........................... 118

Start-off assistActivating ....................................... 194Important safety notes .................. 194

Start/Stop buttonRemoving ....................................... 150Starting the engine ........................ 152

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 151STEER CONTROL .................................. 73Steering

Display message ............................ 264Steering assistant STEER CON-TROL

see STEER CONTROLSteering wheel

Adjusting (manually) ...................... 108Button overview ............................... 33Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 219Cleaning ......................................... 319Important safety notes .................. 108Paddle shifters ............................... 166

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 166Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 232

Index 17

Stowage compartmentsArmrest (front) ............................... 282Armrest (under) ............................. 282Center console .............................. 281Center console (rear) ..................... 282Cup holders ................................... 288Eyeglasses compartment ............... 281Glove box ....................................... 281Important safety information ......... 281Map pockets .................................. 283Stowage net ................................... 283Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 282

Stowage net ....................................... 283Summer tires ..................................... 342Sun visor ............................................ 290Suspension

Adaptive Damping System ............. 199Suspension setting

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 196

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 143

TTachometer ........................................ 219Tail lamps

see LightsTailgate

Display message ............................ 263Emergency unlocking ....................... 89Important safety notes .................... 85Limiting the opening angle ............... 89Obstruction detection ...................... 86Opening dimensions ...................... 383Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 87Opening/closing automaticallyfrom inside ....................................... 88Opening/closing automaticallyfrom outside .................................... 87

Tanksee Fuel tank

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 31

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 377Information .................................... 374

Tires/wheels ................................. 367Vehicle data ................................... 383

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 296Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 296Downloading routes ....................... 299Emergency call .............................. 293General notes ................................ 292Geo fencing ................................... 300Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 298MB info call button ........................ 295Remote vehicle locking .................. 298Roadside Assistance button .......... 294Search & Send ............................... 297Self-test ......................................... 293Speed alert .................................... 300System .......................................... 292Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 300Vehicle Health Check .................... 298Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 297

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 226Display message ............................ 264Introduction ................................... 226Menu (on-board computer) ............ 226Number from the phone book ........ 226Redialing ........................................ 227Rejecting/ending a call ................. 226

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 219Coolant (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 231Engine oil (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 231Outside temperature ...................... 219Setting (climate control) ................ 139Transmission oil (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 231

Through-loading feature ................... 283Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 232Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 348Checking manually ........................ 347Display message ............................ 258Maximum ....................................... 346Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 326

18 Index

Notes ............................................. 345Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 326Recommended ............................... 343

Tire pressure loss warning systemGeneral notes ................................ 347Important safety notes .................. 347Restarting ...................................... 347

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 350Function/notes ............................. 348General notes ................................ 348Important safety notes .................. 348Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 351Restarting ...................................... 350Warning lamp ................................. 278Warning message .......................... 350

Tiredness assistantsee ATTENTION ASSIST

TIREFIT kit .......................................... 324Tire pressure not reached .............. 326Tire pressure reached .................... 326

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 362Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 361Bar (definition) ............................... 360Changing a wheel .......................... 363Characteristics .............................. 360Checking ........................................ 341Curb weight (definition) ................. 362Definition of terms ......................... 360Direction of rotation ...................... 363Display message ............................ 258Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 363DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 361DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 360GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 361General notes ................................ 367GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 361GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 361

Important safety notes .................. 340Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 361Information on driving .................... 340Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 361Labeling (overview) ........................ 357Load bearing index (definition) ...... 362Load index ..................................... 359Load index (definition) ................... 361M+S tires ....................................... 342Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 362Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 361Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 362Maximum tire load ......................... 359Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 362MOExtended tires .......................... 342Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 362PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 362Replacing ....................................... 363Service life ..................................... 342Sidewall (definition) ....................... 362Speed rating (definition) ................ 361Storing ........................................... 363Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 360Summer tires ................................. 342Temperature .................................. 356TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 362Tire bead (definition) ...................... 362Tire pressure (definition) ................ 362Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 361Tire size (data) ............................... 367Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 357Tire tread ....................................... 341Tire tread (definition) ..................... 362Total load limit (definition) ............. 363Traction ......................................... 356Traction (definition) ....................... 362Tread wear ..................................... 356Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 355

Index 19

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 361Wear indicator (definition) ............. 362Wheel and tire combination ........... 369Wheel rim (definition) .................... 361see Flat tire

Toolsee Vehicle tool kit

Top Tether ............................................ 61Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 337Important safety notes .................. 333Installing the towing eye ................ 334Removing the towing eye ............... 335

Towing a trailerESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 72

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 333Installing the towing eye ................ 334Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 336Removing the towing eye ............... 335Transporting the vehicle ................ 336With both axles on the ground ....... 335With front axle raised ..................... 335

Towing eye ......................................... 322Traction system

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

Transmissionsee Automatic transmission

Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 159Transporting the vehicle .................. 336Traveling uphill

Brow of hill ..................................... 183Driving downhill ............................. 183Maximumgradient-climbing capa-bility ............................................... 183

Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 319Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 222Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 221Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 223

Trunk lidsee Tailgate

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 383Turn signals

Changing bulbs (front) ................... 123Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 124Display message ............................ 248Switching on/off ........................... 118

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 374Installation ..................................... 374Transmission output (maximum) .... 374

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 84From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 84

Upshift indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 231

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 290Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 26Data acquisition ............................... 26Display message ............................ 261Equipment ....................................... 24Individual settings .......................... 229Limited Warranty ............................. 26Loading .......................................... 351Locking (in an emergency) ............... 85Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76Lowering ........................................ 366Maintenance .................................... 24Parking for a long period ................ 174Pulling away ................................... 152Raising ........................................... 364Reporting problems ......................... 26Securing from rolling away ............ 364Transporting .................................. 336Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76Vehicle data ................................... 383

20 Index

Vehicle batterysee Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle dataRoof load (maximum) ..................... 383Trunk load (maximum) ................... 383

Vehicle data (off-road driving)Approach/departure angle ............ 384Maximum gradient climbing abil-ity .................................................. 384

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 383Vehicle emergency locking ................ 85Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 376Vehicle tool kit .................................. 322Ventilation

Setting the vents ........................... 144Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 225VIN

Seat ............................................... 376Type plate ...................................... 376

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 269Brakes ........................................... 268Check Engine ................................. 275Coolant .......................................... 275Distance warning ........................... 277ESP® .............................................. 271ESP® OFF ....................................... 272Fuel tank ........................................ 275LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 187Overview .......................................... 32Reserve fuel ................................... 275Restraint system ............................ 274Seat belt ........................................ 266SPORT handling mode ................... 272Tire pressure monitor .................... 278

Washer fluidDisplay message ............................ 264

Wheel and tire combinationsTires ............................................... 369

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 366Wheel chock ...................................... 364

WheelsChanging a wheel .......................... 363Checking ........................................ 341Cleaning ......................................... 316General notes ................................ 367Important safety notes .................. 340Information on driving .................... 340Interchanging/changing ................ 363Mounting a new wheel ................... 366Removing a wheel .......................... 366Storing ........................................... 363Tightening torque ........................... 366Wheel size/tire size ....................... 367

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 244Operation ......................................... 50

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 141

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 311Important safety notes .................. 382

Windshield wipersDisplay message ............................ 264Problem (malfunction) ................... 129Rear window wiper ........................ 126Replacing the wiper blades ............ 126Switching on/off ........................... 125

Winter drivingSlippery road surfaces ................... 179Snow chains .................................. 343

Winter operationGeneral notes ................................ 342

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 342

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 317Important safety notes .................. 126Replacing (rear window) ................ 128Replacing (windshield) ................... 126

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 319Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 21

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 140

22 Index

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try to regen-erate or re-use them. Observe the relevantenvironmental rules and regulations whendisposing of materials. In this way you willhelp to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

Introduction 23

Z

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions insafety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake sys-tem. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsor parts of equal quality. Only use tires,wheels and accessories that have been spe-cifically approved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-tain a supply of genuineMercedes-Benz partsfor necessary service and repair work. In addi-tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-ters provide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 376).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Book-let with you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-vice advisor will record every service for youin the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Breakdown assistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgramoffers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-tance" section in the Service and Warrantybooklet (Canada). You will find both in yourvehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-

24 Introduction

tacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" inthe Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Operating safety

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-ation is subject to the following two condi-tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-ful interference, and 2) These devices mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired oper-ation. Changes ormodifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference, includ-ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equip-ment on the diagnostics connection isused, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions test dur-ing the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-fications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-let.

Introduction 25

Z

Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe vehicle technical dataRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-tact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriaterescue card for your vehicle. The current res-cue card contains the most important infor-mation about your vehicle in a compact form,e.g. the routing of the electric cables.You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data recordingThis vehicle is capable of recording diagnosticinformation relating to vehicle operation,mal-functions, and user settings. This may includeinformation about the performance or statusof various systems, including but not limitedto, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-tems, that is stored and can be read out withsuitable devices, particularly when the vehi-cle is serviced. The data obtained is used toproperly diagnose and service your vehicle orto further optimize and develop vehicle func-tions.

26 Introduction

COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle’soperation, the use of the vehicle in certainsituations, and the location of the vehiclemaybe compiled through COMAND or thembracesystem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual and/or the mbraceTerms and Conditions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performedin certain crash or near crash-like situations,such as during air bag deployment or whenhitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designedto record data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle areoperatingRwhether or not the driver and passengerseat belts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data isrecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type of per-sonal identification data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi-cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessingthe vehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminalmatters as a tool in accident reconstruction,accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since theCrash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used toextract data from the EDR is commerciallyavailable, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-bility arising from the extraction of this infor-mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-sonnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or,if the vehicle is leased, without the consent ofthe lessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by lawenforcement; by federal, state or local gov-ernment; in connection with or arising out oflitigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiariesand affiliates; or, as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint System Module. Tampering with,altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-ponent may result in a malfunction of theRestraint System Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-ted. This means that in the event of such con-flict, the federal regulation governs. As ofFebruary 2013, 13 states have enacted lawsrelating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:

Introduction 27

Z

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

28 Introduction

Cockpit ................................................. 30Instrument cluster .............................. 31Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33Center console .................................... 35Door control panel .............................. 38Overhead control panel ...................... 39

29

Ataglance

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddleshifters 166

; Combination switch 118

= Instrument cluster 31

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 159

B PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 200

C Overhead control panel 39

Function Page

D Climate control systems 132

E Ignition lock 149

F Adjusts the steering wheel 108

G Cruise control lever 184

H Electric parking brake 173

I Light switch 116

J Diagnostics connection 25

K Opens the hood 308

30 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page

: SpeedometerSpeedometer segments 218

; Multifunction display 221

= Tachometer 219

? Coolant temperature 219

Function Page

A Fuel gaugeFuel filler flap location indi-catoræ: the fuel fillercap is on the left.

B Instrument cluster lighting 218

i Information on the display of the outsidetemperature in the multifunction displaycan be found under "Outside temperaturedisplay" (Y page 219).

Instrument cluster 31

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: L Low-beam head-lamps 117

; T Parking lamp 118

= K High-beam head-lamps 118

? ÷ ESP® 271

A Electric parking brake (red)F (USA only)! (Canada only) 274

B ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 274

C J Brakes (yellow) 268

D · Distance warning 277

E #! Turn signals 118

F 6 Restraint system 43

G ü Seat belt 266

Function Page

H M SPORT handlingmode (Mercedes-AMGvehicles) 272

I ? Coolant 275

J R Rear fog lamp 118

K N Fog lamps 117

L ; Check Engine 275

M h Tire pressure monitor 278

N æ Reserve fuel 275

O å ESP® OFF 271

P ! ABS 269

Q Braking 268$ (USA only)J (Canada only)

32 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 221

; Audio 20 or COMAND dis-play (see the separate oper-ating instructions)

Function Page

= ?

Vehicles with Audio 20:switches on voice-operatedcontrol for navigation (seemanufacturer's operatinginstructions)Vehicles with COMAND:switches on the Voice Con-trol System (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)8

MuteWX

Adjusts the volume~

Rejects or ends a call 226Exits the telephone book/redial memory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmem-ory

Multifunction steering wheel 33

Ataglance

Function Page

? =;

Selects a menu 2199:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 219a

Confirms a selection 219Hides display messages 235%

Back 219Vehicles with Audio 20:switches off voice-operatedcontrol of the navigation(see manufacturer's oper-ating instructions)Vehicles with COMAND:switches off the Voice Con-trol System (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

34 Multifunction steering wheelAt

aglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Audio 20/COMAND (seeseparate operating instruc-tions)

; c Seat heating 107Mercedes-AMG vehicles:AMG RIDE CONTROL (leftside) 196Mercedes-AMG vehicles:adjusts the exhaust flap ofthe AMG performanceexhaust system (right side) 155

= Ã Downhill Speed Reg-ulation 197

? c PARKTRONIC 200

Function Page

A è ECO start/stop func-tion 153

B £ Hazard warninglamps 119

C PASSENGER AIR BAG indi-cator lamp 43

D DYNAMIC SELECT button 157å Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles: ESP® 70

E Activates the drivingdynamics display (vehicleswith the Off-Road Engineer-ing package) 200

Center console 35

Ataglance

Center console, lower section

Function Page

: Ashtray 290Cigarette lighter 291Socket 291Stowage compartment 281

; Stowage compartment 281

= Cup holder 288

Function Page

? Stowage compartmentwithMedia Interface 281

A Audio/COMAND control-ler; see the separate oper-ating instructions

36 Center consoleAt

aglance

i Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Function Page

: Ashtray 290Cigarette lighter 291Socket 291Stowage compartment 281

; Selector lever 161

= Manual gearshifting (per-manent setting) 166

Function Page

? DYNAMIC SELECT control-ler 158

A Cup holder 288

B Stowage compartmentwithMedia Interface 281

C Audio/COMAND control-ler; see the separate oper-ating instructions

Center console 37

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: Opens the door 83

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 84

= r45= Savesthe seat and exterior mirrorsettings 112

? Adjusts the seats electri-cally 105

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exte-rior mirrors in/out electri-cally 109

Function Page

B W Opens/closes theside windows 91

C n Activates/deacti-vates the override featurefor the side windows in therear compartment 64

D qOpens the cargo com-partment 88

38 Door control panelAt

aglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: u Switches the rearcompartment interior light-ing on/off 120

; p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 120

= | Switches the frontinterior lighting/automaticinterior lighting control off 120

? ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 295

A Rear-view mirror 109

B Sets the compass 303

C Buttons for the garage dooropener 301

Function Page

D G SOS button (mbracesystem) 293

E F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace sys-tem) 294

F Eyeglasses compartment 281

G 3 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel with rollersunblinds 95

H c Switches the frontinterior lighting on 120

I p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 120

Overhead control panel 39

Ataglance

40

Useful information .............................. 42Panic alarm .......................................... 42Occupant safety .................................. 42Children in the vehicle ........................ 58Pets in the vehicle ............................... 64Driving safety systems ....................... 65Protection against theft ..................... 73

41

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press and hold the! button: for approx. one second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS‑GOX Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk ofvehicle occupants coming into contact withparts of the vehicle's interior in the event ofan accident. The restraint system can alsoreduce the forces to which vehicle occupantsare subjected during an accident.The restraint system comprises:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systemsThe components of the restraint systemworkin conjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times,all vehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 46)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 103).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the cor-rect driver's seat position (Y page 102).You also have tomake sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 48).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehi-cle occupants in the event of an accident. Forexample, if, in the event of an accident, theprotection offered by the seat belt is suffi-cient, the air bags are not deployed. When anaccident occurs, only the air bags thatincrease protection in that particular accidentsituation are deployed. However, seat beltsand air bags generally do not protect againstobjects penetrating the vehicle from the out-side.Information on restraint system operationcan be found under "Triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices and air bags"(Y page 56).

42 Occupant safetySafety

See "Children in the vehicle" for informationon infants and children traveling with you inthe vehicle restraint systems for infants andchildren (Y page 58).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on andat regular intervals while the engine is run-ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-ted in good time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights upwhen the igni-tion is switched on. It goes out no later than afew seconds after the vehicle is started. Thecomponents of the restraint system are inoperational readiness.A malfunction has occurred if the 6restraint system warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition isswitched onRdoes not go out after a few seconds withthe engine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp:and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp; are part of the Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS).The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,in the event of an accident, all deploymentcriteria are met, the front-passenger frontair bag is deployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. It will then not be deployed in the eventof an accident.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be deactivated or enabled;see the following points. You must make sureof this both before and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on theinstalled child restraint system, and the ageand size of the child. Therefore, be sure toobserve the notes on the "Occupant Clas-sification System (OCS)" (Y page 51) andon "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 58).There youwill also find instructions on rear-ward and forward-facing child restraint sys-tems on the front-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the clas-sification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger frontair bag is enabled or deactivated(Y page 51). Be sure to observe the noteson "Seat belts“ (Y page 44) and "Air bags"(Y page 48). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occu-pants in the event of an accident or the vehi-cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with partsof the vehicle interior or being ejected fromthe vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helpsto keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi-tion in relation to the air bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for thefront seat belts and the outer seat belts inthe rearRSeat belt force limiters for the front seatbelts and the outer seat belts in the rear

If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outletquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot beextracted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightensthe seat belt in an accident, pulling the beltclose against the body. However it does notpull the vehicle occupant back in the directionof the backrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does notcorrect an incorrect seat position or the rout-ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helpsto reduce the force exerted by the seat belt onthe vehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags,which absorb part of the deceleration force.This can reduce the force exerted on the vehi-cle occupants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckleof the front-passenger seat. This may oth-erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device in the event of anaccident, which will then need to bereplaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-

44 Occupant safetySafety

tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benzvehicle. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-tion of this Operator's Manual

(Y page 58) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant classifica-tion system (OCS)" (Y page 51)

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.Sports seat or AMGPerformance seat: thisseat is designed for the standard three-pointseat belt. If you install another multi-pointseat belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, therestraint system cannot provide the best levelof protection.

G WARNINGIf you feed seat belts through the opening inthe seat backrest, the seat backrest may bedamaged or may even break in the event of anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Only use the standard three-point seat belt.Never modify the seat belt system.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 44).All vehicle occupants must be wearing theseat belt correctly before beginning the jour-ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-rectly while the vehicle is in motion.When fastening the seat belt, always makesure that:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to thebelt buckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur bedistributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or berouted under your arm. Where possible,adjust the seat belt to the appropriateheight.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low downas possible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdo-men. This applies particularly to pregnantwomen. If necessary, push the lap beltdown to your hip joint and pull it tight usingthe shoulder section of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,pointed or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,store these in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at atime.

Infants and children must never travel sit-ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In theevent of an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seatbelt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.Also ensure that there are never objectsbetween a person and the seat, e.g. cush-ions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observethe "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,luggage or loads (Y page 280).

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 44) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 46).

Basic illustrationX Adjust the seat (Y page 102).The seat backrest must be in an almostvertical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet=.

46 Occupant safetySafety

X Engage seat belt tongue; in beltbuckle:.

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of theshoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.The belt outlet will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt outlet release? andslide belt outlet downwards.

X Let go of belt outlet release? in thedesired position and make sure that thebelt outlet engages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be foundunder "Special seat belt retractor"(Y page 59).

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfill theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Basic illustrationX Press release button:, hold belttongue; firmly and guide it back towardsbelt outlet=.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicleoccupants must wear their seat belts. It maylight up continuously or flash. In addition,there may be a warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belthas already been fastened, the7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up for six seconds eachtime the engine is started. If, aftersix seconds, the driver or front-passengerseat belt has not been fastened and the doorsare closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a frontdoor is opened again, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened afterthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. The warning tone switchesoff after six seconds or once the driver's seatbelt is fastened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarning tone sounds. A warning tone alsosounds with increasing intensity for60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat beltwarning is activated again.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seatbelts" (Y page 266).

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fas-tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seatbelt. The air bag provides additional protec-tion in applicable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems function inde-pendently from one another (Y page 56).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that theseat is in an almost upright position. Thecenter of the head restraint must supportthe head at about eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passengerseats as far back as possible. The driver'sseat position must allow the vehicle to bedriven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-side. This allows the air bag to be fullydeployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean againstthe door or side window. You may other-wise be in the deployment area of the airbags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell infront of the seat. Do not put your feet on thedashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-erwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraintsystems. Up to this height, the seat beltcannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve yearsof age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall insuitable child restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installedon the rear seats.

48 Occupant safetySafety

ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passengerfront air bag is deactivated. If thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp ispermanently lit, the front-passenger frontair bag is deactivated (Y page 43).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Childrenin the vehicle" (Y page 58) in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-vent an air bag from functioning correctly.Before starting your journey and to avoid risksresulting from the speed of the air bag as itdeploys, make sure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploy-ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, sidewindows, rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objectsare in the pockets of your clothing. Storesuch objects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the

function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel. Front-passenger front airbag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for theoccupants in the front seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsinform you about the status of the front-passenger air bag (Y page 43).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen-sor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 51).The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit (Y page 51)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steer-ing column and front-passenger knee bag;under the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags are triggered togetherwith the front air bags.The driver's and front-passenger knee bagsoffer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-tection for the occupants in the front seats.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outerbolster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. It also offersadditional pelvis protection for occupants inthe front seats. However, it does not protectthe:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impactair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys under the fol-lowing conditions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy-ment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deployed inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.

50 Occupant safetySafety

However, it does not protect the chest orarms.In the event of a side impact, the window cur-tain air bag is deployed on the side on whichthe impact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 56).

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the person in the front-passengerseat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag and front-passengerknee bag are either enabled or deactivated.The system does not disable:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

PrerequisitesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with theirback against the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi-ble

If the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classi-fication, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,be sure to observe the correct positioning of

the child restraint system. Never placeobjects under or behind the child restraintsystem, e.g. cushions. The entire base of thechild restraint systemmust always rest on theseat cushion of the front-passenger seat. Thebackrest of the forward-facing child restraintsystemmust lie as flat as possible against thebackrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint systemmust not touch theroof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-rest and the head restraint position accord-ingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

Operation of Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampThe indicator lamps inform you whether thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated orenabled.X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice,or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock.The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsmust light up simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds.

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,in the event of an accident, all deploymentcriteria are met, the front-passenger frontair bag is deployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. It will then not be deployed in the eventof an accident.

If the status of the front-passenger front airbag changes while the vehicle is in motion, anair bag displaymessage appears in the instru-ment cluster (Y page 246). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten-tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON andPASSENGERAIRBAGOFF indicator lamps. Beaware of the status of the front-passengerfront air bag both before and during the jour-ney.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bagmay deploy in an accident. The child could bestruck by the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIRBAGON indicator lamp lights up, do not installa rearward-facing child restraint system onthe front-passenger seat. You can find moreinformation on OCS under "Problemswith theOccupant Classification System"(Y page 55).

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG ON is lit up

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible and fully retract the seatcushion length. Always make sure that theshoulder belt strap is correctly routed fromthe vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulderbelt guide on the child restraint system. Theshoulder belt strap must be routed forwardsand downwards from the vehicle belt sashguide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle beltsash guide and the front-passenger seataccordingly. Always observe the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.

52 Occupant safetySafety

If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to twelve months old, in a stand-ard child restraint system, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up afterthe system self-test and remains lit. Thisindicates that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated.But even in the case of a twelve-month-oldchild, in a standard child restraint system,the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light uppermanently after the system self-test. Thisindicates that the front-passenger front airbag is activated. The result of the classifi-cation is dependent on, among other fac-tors, the child restraint system and thechild's stature. It is recommended that youinstall the child restraint system on a suit-able rear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by aperson of smaller stature (e.g. a teenageror small adult), either the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp lights up and remains lit afterthe system self-test depending on theresult of the classification.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp lights up, move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible. Alterna-tively, a person of smaller stature can siton a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of adult stature, thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sureto observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-cle" (Y page 58).When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6restraint system warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted in this case and does not deploy during anaccident. Have the system checked by quali-fied technicians as soon as possible. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Thefront-passenger seat should only be repairedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-essary repair work carried out at an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessoriesthat have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy. The Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in thefront-passenger seat. Depending on thatresult, the front-passenger front air bag iseither enabled or deactivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps donot light up during the system self-test, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with high deceler-ation. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-

facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lampdisplays the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 51).For more information about the OCS, see"Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem" (Y page 55).

54 Occupant safetySafety

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 53).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up andremains lit, eventhough the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or aperson of a stature cor-responding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat isincorrect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 51).

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, thefront-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or does not stayon.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child upto twelve months oldin a child restraintsystem

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system restson the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest ofthe forward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat as pos-sible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If nec-essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt andthe child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to thechild restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraintaccordingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It isrecommended that you install the child restraint system on asuitable rear seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. The 6 restraint system warn-ing lamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect yourhearing. The powder that is released gener-ally does not constitute a health hazard, but it

may cause short-term breathing difficulties inpeople with asthma or other respiratory prob-lems. Provided it is safe to do so, you shouldleave the vehicle immediately or open thewindow in order to prevent breathing difficul-ties.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-rial, which may require special handling andregard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. InCalifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, therestraint system control unit evaluates impor-tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-ation or acceleration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers theEmergency Tensioning Devices during a fron-tal or rear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational. You can find further informa-tion under: "Restraint system warninglamp" (Y page 43)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in therear compartment are triggered independ-ently of the lock status of the seat belts.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:

56 Occupant safetySafety

RFront air bags as well as driver's and front-passenger knee bagsRWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-mines that deployment can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activatedor deactivated depending on the person onthe front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in anaccident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi-cator lamp is lit. Observe the information onthe PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps(Y page 43).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.During the first deployment stage, the frontair bag is filled with propellant gas to reducethe risk of injuries. The front air bag is fullydeployed with the maximum amount of pro-pellant gas if a second deployment thresholdis reached within a few milliseconds.The activation threshold of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and the air bag are deter-mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel-eration or acceleration which occurs at vari-ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should takeplace in good time at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are essen-tially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-sionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-cleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factorswhich can only be seen andmeasuredafter a collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an air bag.Nor do they provide an indication of air bagdeployment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably,without an air bag being deployed. This is thecase if only parts which are relatively easilydeformed are affected and the rate of decel-

eration is not high. Conversely, air bags maybe deployed even though the vehicle suffersonly minor deformation. This is the case if, forexample, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-gitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficientdeceleration occurs as a result.If the control unit of the restraint systemdetects a side impact or a vehicle rollover, therelevant components of the restraint systemare activated separately depending on theanticipated type of accident.RSide impact air bags on the side where theimpact takes place, independently of theEmergency Tensioning Device and the useof the seat belt on the driver's seat andouter seats in the second rowThe side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys under thefollowing conditions:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side ofimpact, independently of the use of theseat belt and independently of whether thefront-passenger seat is occupiedREmergency Tensioning Devices, if the sys-tem determines that deployment can offeradditional protection in this situationRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger side in certain situationswhen the vehicle rolls over, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by theseat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-dent. The different air bag systems workindependently of each other.

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

How the air bag system works is deter-mined by the severity of the accident detec-ted, especially the vehicle deceleration oracceleration and the apparent type of acci-dent:Rfrontal collisionRside impactRrollover

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending onthe type and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRthe engine is switched off and the fuel sup-ply is cut offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-gency call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install a child restraint system on arear seat. Children are generally better pro-tected there.If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles. The child restraint system must be

appropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes in this section in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS)" (Y page 51)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

58 Children in the vehicleSafety

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly. Particular attention must bepaid to children.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 44) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 46).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height wherea three-point seat belt can be properly fas-tened without a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-er's seat belt, are equippedwith a special seatbelt retractor. When activated, the specialseat belt retractor ensures that the seat beltcannot slacken once the child seat is secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the beltoutlet.

X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is enabled.

X Push the child restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does notloosen.

Removing the child restraint system anddeactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Press the release button of the seat beltbuckle and guide the seat belt tongue backtowards the belt sash guide.The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-ted.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesIf you install a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on the center rear seat, the rear armrest must be folded back as far as possible.You can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-

Children in the vehicle 59

Safety

Z

tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loadingguidelines" (Y page 280).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint sys-tems are:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchoragesIf it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observethe information on the "Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS)" (Y page 51). There youwill also find information on deactivating thefront-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-ards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that are inclu-ded with the child restraint system.Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

60 Children in the vehicleSafety

Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation and operating instructions for thechild restraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system isengaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat beltcould otherwise be damaged.

: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsX Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings:.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings: for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems are installed on the left andright rear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle's seat belt system. Install the childseat according to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mountand the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of

injury even further. If the child restraint sys-tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, thisshould always be used.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protectivefunction. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-ests so that they are in an upright position.

If the rear backrest is not engaged andlocked, the red lock verification indicator willbe visible (Y page 284).

Top Tether anchorages

The Top Tether anchorages are located on therear side of the rear seat backrests.

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

Z

Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:X Move head restraint: upwards.X Route Top Tether belt? under headrestraint:between the twohead restraintbars.

Vehicles without adjustable headrestraints:X TopTether beltwith onebelt strap: routeTop Tether belt? centrally over headrestraint:.

orX Top Tether belt with two belt straps:route one Top Tether belt? to the left andone to the right past the side of headrestraint:.

All vehicles:X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Alwayscomply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Hook Top Tether hook= of Top Tetherbelt? into Top Tether anchorage;.Make sure that:RTop Tether hook= is hooked into TopTether anchorage; as shown.RTop Tether belt? is not twisted.RTop Tether belt? is routed between therear seat backrest and the cargo com-

partment cover if the cargo compart-ment cover is installed.

X Tension Top Tether belt?. Always complywith the child restraint systemmanufactur-er's installation instructionswhen doing so.

Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:X Move head restraint: back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 106). Makesure that you do not interfere with the cor-rect routing of Top Tether belt?.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install the child restraint system on arear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 51).You can thus avoid the risks that could ariseas a result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in thefront-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rear-ward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always make sure thatthe front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 43)

62 Children in the vehicleSafety

is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-ted.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install aforward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Fullyretract the seat cushion length. The entirebase of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passengerseat. The child restraint system must nottouch the roof or be subjected to a load by thehead restraint. Adjust the angle of the seatbackrest and the head restraint positionaccordingly. Alwaysmake sure that the shoul-der belt strap is correctly routed from thevehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guideon the child restraint system. The shoulderbelt strapmust be routed forwards and down-wards from the vehicle belt outlet. If neces-sary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and thefront-passenger seat accordingly.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 64)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 64)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

Children in the vehicle 63

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate: press button:.If indicator lamp; is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in the driv-er's door. If indicator lamp; is off, oper-ation is possible using the switches in therear compartment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

64 Pets in the vehicleSafety

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 65)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 66)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 66)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 69)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 72)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 73)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 73)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, the driving safety systems canneither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. Driving safetysystems are merely aids designed to assistdriving. You are responsible for maintainingthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time, and for stay-ing in lane. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road and weather condi-tions and maintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when there isadequate contact between the tires and theroad surface. Please pay special attention tothe notes on tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths, etc. (Y page 340).Inwintry driving conditions, always usewintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snowchains. Only in this way will the driving safetysystems described in this section work aseffectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.The!ABSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, evenwhen you only brake gently.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 65).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 269) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 236).

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.

Driving safety systems 65

Safety

Z

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.

Off-road ABSAn ABS system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated (Y page 199).At speeds below 20mph (30 km/h), the frontwheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig-ging-in effect achieved in the process reducesthe stopping distance on off-road terrain. Thislimits steering capability.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 65).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

General information

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 65).

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS con-sists of a distance warning function with anautonomous braking function and adaptiveBrake Assist.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS canhelp you to minimize the risk of a front-endcollision with a vehicle ahead or reduce theeffects of such a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically. If youdo not react to the visual and audible collisionwarning, autonomous braking can be initiatedin critical situations. If you apply the brakeyourself in a critical situation, the COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive BrakeAssist assists you.

Important safety notesDetection of hazardous situations can be par-ticularly impaired by:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the important safety notes in the"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 148).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-

66 Driving safety systemsSafety

sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

Switching on/offThe COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isautomatically active after switching on theignition.You can activate or deactivate COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 228). When deactivated,the distance warning function and the auton-omous braking function are also deactivated.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, theæ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.

Distance warning function

General informationThe distancewarning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision witha vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of sucha collision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 65).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionStarting at a speed of approximately 4 mph(7 km/h), the distance warning functionwarns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle infront. An intermittent warning tone will thensound, and the· distance warning lampwill light up in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause the system to display awarning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obsta-cles that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), the distance warning function canalso react to stationary obstacles, such asstopped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distancewarning signal in a critical situation, COLLI-SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assistwith the autonomous braking function.

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

Z

The autonomous braking function:Rgives the driver more time to react to criti-cal driving situationsRcan help the driver to avoid an accident orRreduces the effects of an accidentVehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: theautonomous braking function is available inthe following speed ranges:R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for movingobjectsR4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationaryobjects

Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the auton-omous braking function is available in the fol-lowing speed ranges:R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for movingobjectsR4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationaryobjects

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause the Autonomous Brak-ing Function to intervene.

Adaptive Brake Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 65).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, thedistance warning signal can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col-lision with the vehicle in front, it calculatesthe braking force necessary to avoid a colli-sion. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-tive Brake Assist will automatically increasethe braking force to a level suitable for thetraffic conditions.Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speedsabove 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensortechnology to assess the traffic situation.

Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capableof reacting to moving objects that havealready been detected as such at least onceover the period of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts tostationary obstacles.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 65).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-vene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due toa malfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 65).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 65).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehi-cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is trans-ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Off-road 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem)A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated (Y page 199).

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 65).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towingyour vehicle with the front axle raised, it isimportant that you observe the notes on ESP®(Y page 335).If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upcontinuously, ESP® is deactivated.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the åwarning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 271) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 236).Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes outbefore beginning the journey, ESP® is auto-matically active.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

Z

If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine starts automati-callywhen the driverwants to pull away again.ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-tus.Example: if ESP®was deactivated beforethe engine was switched off, ESP® remainsdeactivated when the engine is switched onagain.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptMercedes‑AMG vehicles)

Important safety notesYou can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-

cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

You can deactivate or activate ESP® via theon-board computer (Y page 227).ESP® deactivated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.ESP® activated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.RTraction control is still activated.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no lon-ger available; nor is it activated if you brakefirmly with assistance from ESP®.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Deactivating/activating ESP®(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 65).

70 Driving safety systemsSafety

You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-dents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-uations described in the following.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon specially designated roads when thevehicle's own oversteering and understeer-ing characteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.The SPORT handling mode messageappears in the multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button: untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.The ÷ OFFmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

X To activate ESP®: briefly press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ESP® ONmessage appears in themultifunc-tion display.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-dling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to alimited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to alimited degree.RTraction control is still activated.

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

Z

REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.RTraction control is still activated.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no lon-ger available; nor is it activated if you brakefirmly with assistance from ESP®.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Off-road ESP®

An ESP® system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated (Y page 199).Off-road ESP® intervenes with a delay if thereis oversteering or understeering, thus improv-ing traction.

ESP® trailer stabilization

General informationIf your vehicle/trailer combination begins toswerve, ESP® assists you in this situation.ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking andlimiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailercombination) begins to lurch, you can onlystabilize the vehicle/trailer combination bydepressing the brake firmly.ESP® trailer stabilization is active abovespeeds of about 65 km/h.ESP® trailer stabilization does not work ifESP® is deactivated or disabled because of amalfunction.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 65).

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 269) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 238).

72 Driving safety systemsSafety

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. In addi-tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKEalso has the HOLD function (Y page 193) andhill start assist (Y page 153).

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steeringwheel in the direction required for vehiclestabilization.This steering assistance is provided in partic-ular if:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are ona wet or slippery road surface when youbrake.Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 65).

No steering assistance is provided fromSTEER CONTROL, if:RESP® is malfunctioning.Rthe lighting is faulty.If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assistedfurther by the electrical power steering.

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.

X To activate with the SmartKey: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: switch the igni-tion off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any-one can start the engine if a valid SmartKeyhas been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be star-ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged),the system is not operational. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys-tem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Protection against theft 73

Safety

Z

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe tailgateRthe hoodX To switch the alarm off with the Smart-Key: press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 149).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically notifies the Cus-tomer Assistance Center. This is doneeither by text message or data connection.The emergency call system sends the mes-sage or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-vice.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

74 Protection against theftSafety

Useful information .............................. 76SmartKey ............................................. 76Doors .................................................... 83Cargo compartment ............................ 85Side windows ...................................... 90Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ........................................ 94

75

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function:do not keep the SmartKey in the cargo com-partment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may notbe detected, e.g. when starting the engineusing the Start/Stop button.

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To open the tailgate= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton.If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rprotection against theft is reactivated.

X To lock: press the& button.

76 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe tailgateRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.When the locator lighting is activated in Audio20/COMAND, it also lights up when it is darkafter the vehicle is unlocked with the remotecontrol (see the separate operating instruc-tions).You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 230).X To open the tailgate automatically fromoutside the vehicle:press and hold buttonF until the tailgate opens (Y page 87).

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function:X Toclose the tailgate automatically fromoutside the vehicle: if the key is located inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle, presstheF button on the key (Y page 87).When the tailgate closes you can thenrelease the button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear inmind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is aSmartKey in the vehicle.

Locking and unlockingYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunctions of KEYLESS-GOwith those of a con-ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle byusing KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock itusing the& button on the SmartKey.

The driver's door and the door at which thehandle is used, must both be closed. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle. Whenlocking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, thedistance between the SmartKey and the cor-responding door handle must not be greaterthan 3 ft (1 m).A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhilst drivingRwhen the external door handles aretouchedRduring convenience closing

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-face: or;.Make sure that you do not touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an exten-ded period.Further information on the convenienceclosing feature (Y page 92).

SmartKey 77

Openingandclosing

Z

X To unlock the tailgate: pull tailgate han-dle:.

Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use the vehicle for alonger period of time, you can deactivate KEY-LESS-GO. The SmartKey will then use very lit-tle power, thereby conserving battery power.For the purposes of activation/deactivation,the vehicle must not be nearby.X To deactivate: press the& button onthe SmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp of the SmartKeyflashes twice briefly and lights up once,then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated(Y page 80).

X To activate: press any button on theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea-tures are available again.

KEYLESS-GO start function

General notesBear inmind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is aSmartKey in the vehicle.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. Thismeans that only the driver's doorand the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-quently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and hold the% and& buttons simultaneously forapproximately six seconds until the batteryindicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 80).

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, press-ing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock: press the% button once.X To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch theinner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold the% and& buttons simul-taneously for approximately six secondsuntil the battery check lamp flashes twice(Y page 80).

78 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the trunk lid, theanti-theft alarm system will be triggered(Y page 73).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X To deactivate the alarm with the key:press the% or& button on the key.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni-tion lock. The SmartKey must be in thevehicle.

orX Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey must be outside thevehicle.

If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 84)Runlocking the cargo compartment(Y page 89)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 85)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely intothe SmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Nationalguidelines must be observed during disposal.In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe battery replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

SmartKey 79

Openingandclosing

Z

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 80).i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 79).

X Press mechanical key; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of the

arrow until battery tray cover: opens.When doing so, do not hold cover: shut.

X Remove battery tray cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover:and then press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey(Y page 79).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

80 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start func-tion: try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote con-trol function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the key at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the% or& button.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 80).

X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start func-tion: try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote con-trol function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the key at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the% or& button.

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 80).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using themechanical key.

SmartKey 81

Openingandclosing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remotecontrol function:X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

the on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 329).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 331).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using theStart/Stop button. TheSmartKey is in the vehi-cle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 80).

If this does not work:X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

82 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the cargo compartment. Observe the load-ing guidelines (Y page 280).

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe inside

X To unlock and open a front door: pulldoor handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and opens.

X To unlock a rear door: pull up lockingknob:.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle;.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only openthe rear doors from inside the vehicle if theyare not secured by the child-proof locks(Y page 64).If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey from the outside, opening adoor from the inside will trigger the anti-theftalarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 73).

Doors 83

Openingandclosing

Z

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. This can be useful if you wishto lock the vehicle before pulling away, forexample.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If all the doors and the tailgate are closed,the vehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can open therear doors from inside the vehicle unless theyare secured by the child-proof lock(Y page 64).If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey from the outside, opening adoor from the inside will trigger the anti-theftalarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 73).If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the lockingbutton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre-viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only the

door which has been opened from the insideis unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button:for approximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.You could therefore lock yourself out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-board com-puter (Y page 230).

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 73).

84 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 79).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as it will go to position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 79).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani-cal key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the tailgate.

X Press the locking button on the driver’sdoor (Y page 84).

X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs by hand, if necessary.

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 79).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key clockwise as far asit will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the tailgateare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 79).

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Cargo compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the close button or STOP button onthe tailgate.Rpull the handle on the tailgate.

Cargo compartment 85

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

The opening dimensions of the tailgate can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 383).You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the cargo compartment. Observe the load-ing guidelines (Y page 280).Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-partment. You could otherwise lock yourselfout.The tailgate can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRvehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate:open/close automatically from the outsideRvehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate:open/close automatically from the insideRvehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate andwith KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start

function: closedwith the remote operatingswitch on the SmartKeyRreleased with the emergency release fromthe inside

Obstacle recognition with tailgatereversing featureOn vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate, thetailgate is equipped with automatic obstaclerecognition with a reversing feature. If a solidobject blocks or restricts the tailgate whenautomatically opening or closing, this proce-dure is stopped. If the tailgate is stopped dur-ing the closing process, the tailgate automat-ically opens again slightly. The automaticobstacle recognition with reversing feature isonly an aid. It is not a substitute for yourattentiveness when opening and closing thetailgate.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door orRpress the closing button/STOP button inthe tailgate orRpull the handle on the tailgate

86 Cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

Opening and closing manually

Opening

X Press the% button on the key.X Pull handle:.X Raise the tailgate.

Closing

X Pull the tailgate down using handle:.X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the&button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in

the closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the close button or STOP button onthe tailgate.Rpull the handle on the tailgate.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

Two warning tones sound while the tailgate isopening or closing.The opening dimensions of the tailgate can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 383).

Opening automaticallyYou can open the tailgate automatically withthe SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.X Press and hold theF button on the keyuntil the tailgate opens.

orX If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handleand let it go again immediately.

Cargo compartment 87

Openingandclosing

Z

Closing automaticallyVehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: you canalso close the tailgate automatically from out-side.

For example, vehicles with KEYLESS-GOX To close: press button: on the tailgate.orX Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate andKEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start func-tion: if the key is located in the immediatevicinity of the vehicle, press theF but-ton on the key.You can release the button as soon as thetailgate starts to close.

Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate andKEYLESS-GO: when the driver's door isclosed you can simultaneously close the tail-gate and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GOkey must be in the rear detection range of thevehicle.X To close the tailgate and lock the vehi-cle: press locking button; on the tailgate.If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehi-cle within the rear detection range of KEY-LESS-GO, the tailgate closes.The vehicle is locked.

X To stop the closing process: press but-ton: on the tailgate again.

orX Pull the handle in the tailgate.orX Press theF button on the key until thetailgate stops.

orX Press or pull the remote operating switchon the driver's door.

Opening/closing automatically frominside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetailgate.Rpull the handle on the tailgate

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

Two warning tones sound while the tailgate isopening or closing.

88 Cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

The opening dimensions of the tailgate can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 383).

Opening and closing automaticallyYou can open the tailgate from the driver'sseat when the vehicle is stationary andunlocked.It is only possible to close the tailgate fromthe driver's seat on vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate.

X To open: pull remote operating switch forthe tailgate: until the tailgate opens.

X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).

X Press and hold remote operating switch forthe tailgate: until the tailgate is com-pletely closed.

Limiting the opening angle of the tail-gate

General notes

! Make sure there is sufficient clearance toopen the tailgate fully when setting theopening angle. The tailgate could otherwisebe damaged. Ideally, set the opening angleoutside.

You can limit the opening angle of the tail-gate. This could be useful, for example, ifthere is insufficient space above the tailgate.It is possible to limit the tailgate in the top halfof its opening range.

To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle onthe outside of the tailgate again after it hasstopped automatically. This does not deletethe stored position.

ActivatingX To open the tailgate: pull the handle onthe tailgate.

X To stop the opening process at thedesired position:Rpress the closing button in the tailgate, orRpull the handle on the outside of the tail-gate again, orRpress the tailgate button on the key.

X To store the position: press and hold theclosing button in the tailgate until two shorttones sound.The opening angle limiter is activated. Thetailgate will now stop in the stored positionwhen opening.

DeactivatingX Press and hold the closing button in thetailgate until you hear a short tone.

Emergency release

General notes

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

The opening dimensions of the tailgate can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 383).If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:Rusing the SmartKey, orRusing the remote operating switch in thedoor control panel:

Use the emergency release on the inside ofthe tailgate.

Cargo compartment 89

Openingandclosing

Z

You can reach the emergency release via thecargo compartment.

Opening

X Fold the rear seat backrest forwards(Y page 284).

X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 79).

X Insert mechanical key; into opening:in the trim and push it in.

X Open the tailgate.X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 79).

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebody

becomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window from trav-eling upwards during the automatic closingprocess, the side window opens again auto-matically. During themanual closing process,the side window only opens again automati-cally after the corresponding switch isreleased. The automatic reversing feature isonly an aid and is no substitute for your atten-tion when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhile resettingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

90 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X To openmanually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To closemanually: pull the correspondingswitch and hold it.

X To close fully: pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation:press/pull the corresponding switch again.i If you press/pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.

i You can continue to operate the side win-dows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function

remains active for five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

i When the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 64), the sidewindows cannot be operated from the rear.

Convenience openingVehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESS-GO start function, Exclusive Package orAMG Exclusive Package: you can ventilatethe vehicle before you start driving.The SmartKey can also be used to carry outthe following functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind

The convenience opening feature can only beoperated using the SmartKey.The "convenience opening" feature is alsoavailable when the vehicle is unlocked.X Vehicles with Exclusive Package orAMG Exclusive Package but withoutKEYLESS-GO and the KEYLESS-GO startfunction: for the following operations,point the tip of the SmartKey at the doorhandle on the driver's door. The SmartKeymust be close to the driver's door handle.i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-LESS-GO start function: the SmartKeymust be in close proximity to the vehicle.

X Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the panorama sunroofare in the desired position.If the roller sunblind of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel is closed, theroller sunblind is opened first.

X Press and hold the% button once moreuntil the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel reaches the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Side windows 91

Openingandclosing

Z

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESS-GO start function, Exclusive Package orAMG Exclusive Package: at the same timeyou can:Rlock the vehicleRclose the side windowsRclose the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblind.

i Notes on the automatic reversing featurefor:Rthe side window (Y page 90)Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel (Y page 95)Rthe roller sunblind (Y page 97)

Using the SmartKeyX Vehicles with Exclusive Package orAMG Exclusive Package but withoutKEYLESS-GO and the KEYLESS-GO startfunction: for the following operations,point the tip of the SmartKey at the doorhandle on the driver's door. The SmartKeymust be close to the driver's door handle.i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-LESS-GO start function: the SmartKeymust be in close proximity to the vehicle.

X Press and hold the& button until theside windows and the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the& button again untilthe roller sunblind of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel closes.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe driver's door and the door at which thehandle is used, must both be closed. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle. Thegap between the SmartKey and the corre-sponding door handle should not be greaterthan 3 ft (1 m).

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are fully closed.i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-sor surface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows areclosed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed.

92 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle again until the roller sunblindof the panorama sliding sunroof closes.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 91).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the side win-dow is completely closed (Y page 91).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the respective side window remainsclosed after the button is released, then ithas been set correctly. If this is not thecase, repeat the steps above again.

Side windows 93

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

A side window cannotbe closed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannotbe closed and you can-not see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Panorama roofwith power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notesIn the following section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

94 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

G WARNINGAt high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-matically lowers slightly at the rear. This couldtrap you or other persons. There is a risk ofinjury. Make sure that nobody reaches intothe sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst thevehicle is in motion.If somebody becomes trapped, immediatelypull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-ing sunroof lifts during opening.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise,malfunctionsmayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closedwhen you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicle inte-rior.

i Resonance noises can occur in addition tothe usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureIn the following section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel.The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel

Opening and closing

: To raise; To open= To close/lowerThe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel can only be operated when the rollersunblind is open.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 95

Openingandclosing

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press/pull the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.After opening the sliding sunroof, the rollersunblind closes slightly automatically. Thisreduces drafts in the vehicle interior.If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, itlowers slightly automatically at higherspeeds. The noise level in the vehicle interioris reduced as a result.At low speeds it raises again automatically.You can also temporarily deactivate auto-matic lowering. To do so, press the3switch. The sliding sunroof raises again auto-matically.You can continue to operate the sliding sun-roof after switching off the engine or remov-ing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Thisfunction remains active for five minutes oruntil you open a front door.The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roofcarrier is installed. In order to allow ventila-tion of the vehicle interior, you can raise thesliding sunroof.If contact ismadewith a roof carrier approvedby Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowersslightly but remains raised at the rear.

Rain-closing featureThe rain-closing feature is only available forvehicles with a rain sensor.When the SmartKey is in position 0 in theignition lock or is removed, the sliding sunroofcloses automatically:Rif it starts to rain.Rat extreme outside temperatures.

Rafter six hours.Rif there is a malfunction in the power sup-ply.

The panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel remains raised at the rear in order toallow ventilation of the vehicle interior.If the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is obstructed while being closed by therain-closing feature, it opens again slightly.The rain-closing feature is then deactivated.The panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel does not close if:Rit is raised at the rear.Rit is blocked.Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind-shield being monitored by the rain sensor.If the vehicle is under a bridge or in a car-port, for example, the field of the sensormay be covered.

Operating the roller sunblind for thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trappedbetween the roller sunblind and frame or slid-ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-ing. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing, make sure that nobody parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-blind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The roller sunblind can only beopened and closed when the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel is closed.

96 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblind is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the roller sunblind duringthe closing process, the roller sunblind opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the roller sunblind.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhen closing the roller sunblind again man-ually immediately after automatic reversal

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.When closing the roller sunblind, make surethat no body parts are in the sweep area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing

: To open; To open= Closing

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press/pull the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.After opening the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, the roller sunblind automat-ically closes slightly. This reduces drafts inthe vehicle interior.

Resetting the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel or the rollersunblind

Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel or the roller sunblind, if the pano-rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or theroller sunblind does not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X Pull the3 button repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow:until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow:until the roller sunblind is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 97

Openingandclosing

Z

X Make sure that the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel and the roller sun-blind can be fully opened and closed again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove.

98 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

G WARNINGIf you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption, then thebacking up function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased ormaximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This posesan increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contacta qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panelcannot be closed andyou cannot see thecause.

If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructedduring closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again tothe point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed withmore force.

If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructedagain during closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again tothe point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with-out the automatic reversing feature.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 99

Openingandclosing

Z

100

Useful information ............................ 102Correct driver's seat position .......... 102Seats .................................................. 103Steering wheel .................................. 108Mirrors ............................................... 109Memory function ............................... 112

101

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 103).

X Make sure that seat= is adjusted prop-erly.Manual seat adjustment (Y page 104)Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 105)When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possibleRyou are sitting in a normal upright posi-tionRyou can fasten the seat belt properlyRyou have moved the backrest to analmost vertical positionRyou have set the seat cushion angle sothat your thighs are gently supportedRyou can depress the pedals properly

X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-ted properly (Y page 105).When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety notes on steering col-umn adjustment (Y page 108).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjus-ted properly.Adjusts the steering wheel (Y page 108)When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steeringwheel with yourarms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 44).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 46).

102 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of yourshoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across thehip joints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir-ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 109) insuch a way that you have a good view ofroad and traffic conditions.

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat and exterior mirror settings(Y page 112).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there isno SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 48) and "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 58).

G WARNINGIf the driver's seat is not engaged, it couldmove unexpectedly while the vehicle is inmotion. This could cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Always make sure that the driver's seat isengaged before starting the vehicle.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating mate-

Seats 103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

i Further related subjects:Rcargo compartment enlargement (fold-ing down the rear seats) (Y page 284)

Adjusting the seats manually

Vehicles without the seating comfortpackage

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:X Lift handle: and slide the seat forwardsor backwards.

X Release lever: again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Backrest angle:X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.X Turn handwheel= forwards or backwards.

Seat height:X Pull handle; upwards or push it downrepeatedly until the seat has reached thedesired height.

Vehicles with the seating comfort pack-age

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:X Lift handle: and slide the seat forwardsor rearwards.

X Release lever: again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Backrest angle:X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.X Turn handwheelA forwards or backwards.

Seat height:X Pull handle? upwards or push it downrepeatedly until the seat has reached thedesired height.

Seat cushion angle:X Adjust the angle so that your thighs arelightly supported.

X Turn handwheel= forwards or backwards.

Seat cushion length:X Lift handle; and slide the front section ofthe seat cushion forwards or backwards.

X Release lever; again.The seat cushion engages.

104 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Seat height; Seat cushion angle= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment? Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 112).

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the head

restraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust thehead restraint so that it is as close as possibleto your head.

General notesFor vehicles with sports seats you cannotadjust the front head restraints or the outerrear head restraints.

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the fore/aft position of thehead restraint

Seats 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back ofthe seat occupant's head.X To move forwards: pull the head restraintforwards in the direction of the arrow untilit engages.There are several notches.

X To move backwards: press and holdrelease button: and push the headrestraint backwards.

X When the head restraint is in the desiredposition, release the button and make surethat the head restraint is engaged in posi-tion.

Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

: Raises the backrest contour; Softens the backrest contour= Lowers the backrest contour? Hardens the backrest contour

AMG Performance SeatVehicles with electrically adjustable seats: toadjust the contour of the seat and forimproved lateral support, you can individuallyadjust the front seats.

Adjusting the side bolsters of the seatcushionX To set the side bolsters of the seatcushion narrower: press button:.

X To set the side bolsters of the seatcushion wider: press button;.

Adjusting the seat backrest side bolstersX To set the side bolsters of the seatbackrest narrower: press button=.

X To set the side bolsters of the seatbackrest wider: press button?.

106 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Seats 107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating willswitch back on automatically.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.

Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

: Release lever; Adjusts the steering wheel height= Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely.The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

108 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-hand exte-rior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the correct position. Youshould have a good overview of traffic con-ditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.After the engine has been started, the exte-rior mirrors are automatically heated at lowoutside temperatures. Heating takes a maxi-mum of ten minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectricallyThis function is only available in Canada.

Mirrors 109

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in theexterior mirrors.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyThis function is only available in Canada.If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 231):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: press and hold mirror-foldingbutton (Y page 109) until you hear a clickand then the mirrors engage in position.The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 109).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function isonly available if the vehicle is equipped withthe "Mirrors package".

110 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or the interior lightingis switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

General notesThe "Parking position of the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side" function is onlyavailable if the vehicle is equipped with the"Mirrors package".

Setting and storing the parking positionYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store this posi-tion.

Using reverse gear

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror; Button for the front-passenger side exte-

rior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button M

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror. You should see the rearwheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M?.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror. You should see the rearwheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Mirrors 111

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side with the corresponding but-ton (Y page 109).

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you have disen-gaged reverse gearRif you press button: for the exterior mir-ror on the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen the memory function adjusts the seat,you and other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat. If somebodybecomes trapped, immediately release thememory function position button. The adjust-ment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Thememory function can be used at any time,e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the igni-tion lock.

Storing settingsWith the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rseat and backrest positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-rors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 105).X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver'sside (Y page 109).

X Briefly press the M memory button andthen press storage position button1,2 or3within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position. A tone sounds when the set-tings have been completed.

112 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant preset positionbutton 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exteriormirrors are in the stored position.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

Memory function 113

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

114

Useful information ............................ 116Exterior lighting ................................ 116Interior lighting ................................. 120Replacing bulbs ................................. 121Windshield wipers ............................ 125

115

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, operation of the headlamps varies dueto legal requirements and self-imposed obli-gations.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using the:Rlight switchRcombination switch (Y page 118)Ron-board computer (Y page 230)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampC N Fog lamp (only vehicles with front

fog lamps)If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to theà position.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0 in the ignition lock.

Automatic headlamp modeà is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accord-ing to the brightness of the ambient light(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-ditions such as fog, snow or spray):RKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: theparking lamps are switched on or off auto-

116 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

matically depending on the brightness ofthe ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have acti-vated the daytime running lamps functionvia the on-board computer, the daytimerunning lamps or the parking lamps and thelow-beamheadlamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.

X To switch on the automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch to theÃposition.

G WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Canada only:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-time running lamps function is required by lawinCanada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if youturn the light switch to the T position, thedaytime running lamps and parking lampsturn on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to the L position, the manual set-tings take precedence over the daytime run-ning lamps.USA only:

The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,the daytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 230).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to the T or L position, theman-ual settings take precedence over the day-time running lamps.

Low-beam headlampsEven if the light sensor does not detect that itis dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The greenL indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Front fog lampsIn conditions where visibility is poor due tofog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve vis-ibility aswell asmaking it easier for other roadusers to see you. They can be operatedtogether with the parking lamps or togetherwith the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps.X To switch on the fog lamps: turn the keyin the ignition lock to position 2 or start theengine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the N button.The greenN indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

X To switch off the fog lamps: press theN button.The greenN indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Exterior lighting 117

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The greenT indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-ted.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey should not be in the ignition lockor it should be in position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam head-lamps:move the combination switch backto its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

118 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle reaches a speed ofabove 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a fullbrake application.The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better vis-ibility in tight bends, for example. It can onlybe activated when the low-beam headlampsare switched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality ofthe headlamp.

Exterior lighting 119

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: p Switches the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

; c Switches the front interior lightingon

= v Switches the rear interior lightingon/off

? | Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off

A p Switches the right-hand front read-ing lamp on/off

B Switches the automatic interior lightingcontrol on

Rear compartment control panel

Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel: p To switch the reading lamp on/off

Vehicles without a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: p To switch the left-hand reading lamp

on/off; p To switch the right-hand reading

lamp on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept when the key is in position 2 in theignition lock.The color and brightness for the ambientlighting may be set using COMAND or Audio20 (see the separate operating instructions).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on: set the switch to centerpositionB.

X To switch off: set the switch to the |position.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRRemove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

The interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the igni-tion lock. This delayed switch-off can be

120 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

adjusted using COMAND or Audio 20 (see theseparate Operator's Manual).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on:set the switch to the c position.

X To switch the front interior lighting off:set the switch to the| position or (if thedoor is closed) to the center position.

X To switch the rear interior lighting on oroff: press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamp on or off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notesXenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work onthe Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back again

when you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only install sparebulbs of the same type and the specified volt-age.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tubewith your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contactwith liquids.There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Only replace thebulbs listed (Y page 122). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.

Replacing bulbs 121

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can replace the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Vehicles with halogen headlamps: Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W; Low-beam headlamp/daytime running

lamp/parking lamp/standing lamp:H15 55 W/15 W

= Low-beam headlamp: H15 55 W

Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps): Backup lamp: W 16 W; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W= Brake lamp: W 16 W? Rear fog lamp: H 21 W

Changing the front bulbs

Removing and installing the cover in thefront wheel housing

Youmust remove the cover of the front wheelhousing before you can change the front turnsignal lamp.X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.X Slide cover: up and remove it.X To install: insert cover: again and slide itdown until it engages.

122 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-lamps)

X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 122).

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull out.

X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; and turn it clockwise.X Press on housing cover: and turn it to theright.

X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 122).

High-beam headlamps/daytime run-ning lamps/parking lamps and stand-ing lamps (halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Turn bulb; counter-clockwise and pull itout.

X Insert the new bulb and engage it to thestop.

X Press on housing cover: and turn it to theright.

Turn signals (halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn bulb holder: counter-clockwise andpull out.

X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder:.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder:.X Insert bulb holder: and turn it clockwiseuntil it engages.

Cornering light function (Xenon bulbs)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand remove it.

Replacing bulbs 123

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull out.

X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; and turn it clockwise.X Press on housing cover: and turn it to theright.

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim pan-els

Left-hand side trim panel

You must open the side paneling in the cargocompartment before you can replace thebulbs in the tail lamps.X To open: turn release knob: counter-clockwise and remove side trim panel;.

X To close: insert side trim panel; and turnrelease knob: clockwise.

Right-hand side trim panel

You must open the side paneling in the cargocompartment before you can replace thebulbs in the tail lamps.X To open: release right-hand trim panel:at the top and fold it down in the directionof the arrow.

X To close: insert side paneling:.

Tail lampsDue to their location, have the bulbs in thebackup lamp (vehicles with halogen head-lamps) and rear fog lamp in the tailgatechanged at a qualified specialist workshop.X Switch off the lights.X Open the cargo compartment.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 124).

X Release and remove connector;.X Hold the tail lamp and unscrew fendernut:.

X Remove the tail lamp.

Tail lamps

124 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Loosen screws= using a screwdriver.X Remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp.

Bulb holder? Turn signalA Brake lampX Turn signal: press the bulb gently into thebulb holder, turn it counter-clockwise andremove it from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder andturn it clockwise.

X Brake lamp: remove the correspondingbulb from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.X Insert the bulb holder into the tail lamp andscrew it firmly into place using screws=.

X Insert the tail lamp into the vehicle.X Tighten fender nut: and re-establish con-tact with connector;.

X Close the side trim panel (Y page 124).

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always

use washer fluid when operating the wind-shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-

shield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind-shield becomes dirty in dry weather condi-tions, the windshield wipers may be activa-ted inadvertently. This could then damagethe windshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä orÅ position, the appropriate wiping fre-quency is automatically set according to theintensity of the rain. In the Å position, the

Windshield wipers 125

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Äposition, causing thewindshieldwiper towipemore frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions.

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Switch2 ô Wipes with washer fluid3 I Switches on intermittent wiping4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping5 ô Wipes with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Slide switch: on the combination switchto the corresponding position.When the rearwindowwiper is switched on,the è symbol appears in the assistancegraphic in the instrument cluster. Furtherinformation on the assistance graphic(Y page 227).

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you could

be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield/rear window.Never fold awindshieldwiper armwithout awiper blade back onto the windshield/rearwindow.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe wiper arm without a wiper blade and itfalls onto the windshield/rear window, thewindshield/rear window may be damagedby the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades(variant 1)

Removing the wiper bladesX Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: switch offthe engine.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-shield.

126 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Press both release clips;.X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= away from wiper arm?.

X Remove wiper blade: in the direction ofarrowA.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position newwiper blade:with recessBon lugA.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= onto the wiper arm, until retainingclips; engage in bracket?.

X Make sure that wiper blade: is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-shield.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades(variant 2)

Removing the wiper bladesX Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: switch offthe engine.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-shield.

X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand.With the other hand, turn wiper blade indirection of arrow: away from the wiperarm as far as it will go.

X Slide catch; in the direction of arrow=until it engages in the removal position witha noticeable click.

X Remove the wiper blade in the direction ofarrow? away from the wiper arm.

Installing the wiper blades

X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiperarm in the direction of arrow:.

Windshield wipers 127

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X Slide catch; in the direction of arrow=until it engages in the locking position witha noticeable click.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-shield.

X Remove protective film: of the serviceindicator on the tip of the wiper blade.

If the color of the service indicator changesfrom black to yellow, the wiper blades shouldbe replaced.

i The duration of the color change variesdepending on the usage conditions.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Fold wiper arm? away from the rear win-dow.

X Press both release clips;.X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= away from wiper arm?.

X Remove wiper blade: in the direction ofarrowA.

Installing a wiper blade

X Position newwiper blade:with recessBon lugA.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= onto the wiper arm, until retainingclips; engage in bracket?.

X Make sure that wiper blade: is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win-dow.

128 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spraynozzles no longer hitsthe center of the wind-shield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Windshield wipers 129

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

130

Useful information ............................ 132Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 132Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 137Air vents ............................................ 144

131

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

The air-conditioning system/dual-zone auto-matic climate control regulates the tempera-ture and the humidity of the vehicle interiorand filters out undesirable substances fromthe air.The air-conditioning system/dual-zone auto-matic climate control can only be operatedwhen the engine is running. Optimum opera-tion is only achieved with the side windowsand panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel closed.If you start the engine using your smartphone,the last selected climate control setting isreactivated (Y page 171).

The residual heat function can only be acti-vated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 143).Always keep the ventilation flaps behind theside trim panel in the cargo compartmentclear (Y page 124). Otherwise the vehicle willnot be ventilated correctly.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using the con-venience opening feature (Y page 91). Thiswill speed up the cooling process and thedesired interior temperature will bereached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par-ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-lutants and odors. A clogged filter reducesthe amount of air supplied to the vehicleinterior. For this reason, you should alwaysobserve the interval for replacing the filter,which is specified in the MaintenanceBooklet. As it depends on environmentalconditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, theinterval may be shorter than stated in theMaintenance Booklet.

i It is possible that under certain circum-stances the residual heat function may beactivated automatically an hour after theSmartKey has been removed in order to drythe automatic climate control. The vehicleis then ventilated for 30 minutes.

132 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Air-conditioning system control panel

USA only: Sets the temperature (Y page 139); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 141)= Sets the air distribution (Y page 140)? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 143)A Sets the airflow (Y page 140)B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 142)

Canada only: Sets the temperature (Y page 139); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 141)= Sets the air distribution (Y page 140)

Overview of climate control systems 133

Climatecontrol

? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 143)A Sets the airflow (Y page 140)B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 142)

Notes on using the air-conditioningsystem

Air-conditioning systemBelow, you can find a number of notes andrecommendations to help you use the air-conditioning system optimally.RSwitch on the air-conditioning system byturning control knobA clockwise to thedesired position (except position 0).RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).RRecommendation for avoiding mistedwindows at low exterior temperaturesor in rain: switch on the¿ cooling withdehumidification function (Y page 138).Set air distribution to¯ and if possibleswitch offP andO (Y page 140).Deactivate air-recirculation modee(Y page 143).Set airflow controlA to a setting between3 and 6 (Y page 140).RRecommendation for rapid cooling orheating of the vehicle interior: briefly setairflow controlA to a setting between 3and 6 (Y page 140).RRecommendation for a constant vehi-cle interior temperature: set airflow con-trolA to a setting between 1 and 3(Y page 140).RRecommendation for air distribution inwinter: select theO and¯ settings(Y page 140).Recommendation for air distribution insummer: select theP orP and¯ settings (Y page 140).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.

ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RIf you change the settings of the climatecontrol system, the climate status displayappears for approximately three secondsat the bottom of the screen in the Audio/COMAND display (see separate operatinginstructions). You will see the current set-tings of the various climate control func-tions.

DYNAMIC SELECT button (exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles)You can choose between various drive pro-grams with the DYNAMIC SELECT button(Y page 157).If you have selected drive program E:Rwhen heating, the electrical heater boosteris deactivated and in the warming-up phaseheat output is reducedRthe rear window defroster running time isreduced

Depending on the configuration, the climatesettings can also be influenced in drive pro-gram I.If you have selected drive program C or S, theclimate settings are not affected.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 155).

134 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 139); Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 139)= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 141)? Increases the airflow (Y page 140)A Sets the air distribution (Y page 140)B DisplayC Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 143)D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 137)E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 139)F Activates/deactivates maximum cooling (Y page 141)G Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)H Reduces the airflow (Y page 140)I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 142)J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 140)

Overview of climate control systems 135

Climatecontrol

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 139); Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 139)= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 141)? Increases the airflow (Y page 140)A Sets the air distribution (Y page 140)B DisplayC Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 143)D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 137)E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 139)F Switches the residual heat function on/off (Y page 143)G Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)H Reduces the airflow (Y page 140)I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 142)J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 140)

Optimum use of dual-zone automaticclimate control

Climate control systemThe following contains instructions and rec-ommendations to enable you to get the mostout of your 3-zone automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-perature settings on the driver's side forthe front-passenger side as well. The indi-cator lamp in theá button goes out.

136 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

RUse the residual heat function if youwant toheat or ventilate the vehicle interior whenthe ignition is switched off. The residualheat function can only be activated or deac-tivated with the ignition switched off.RIf you change the settings of the climatecontrol system, the climate status displayappears for approximately three secondsat the bottom of the screen in the Audio/COMAND display (see separate operatinginstructions). You will see the current set-tings of the various climate control func-tions.

DYNAMIC SELECT button (exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles)You can choose between various drive pro-grams with the DYNAMIC SELECT button(Y page 157).If you have selected drive program E:Rwhen heating, the electrical heater boosteris deactivated and in the warming-up phaseheat output is reducedRthe rear window defroster running time isreduced

Depending on the configuration, the climatesettings can also be influenced in drive pro-gram I.If you have selected drive program C or S, theclimate settings are not affected.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 155).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Activating/deactivating the climatecontrol

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly

Air-conditioning systemX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To switch on: turn controlA clockwise tothe desired position (except position 0)(Y page 133).

X To switch off: turn controlA counter-clockwise to position 0 (Y page 133).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

i Dual-zone automatic climate control:switch on climate control primarily usingtheà button.

Operating the climate control systems 137

Climatecontrol

Switching cooling with air dehumidi-fication on/off

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, onlydeactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-cation" function briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Switching on/offX To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button goesout. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

138 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe¿ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidifi-cation" function cannotbe switched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesThe automatic function is only available inconjunctionwith dual-zone automatic climatecontrol.In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates the tem-perature of the dispensed air, the airflow andthe air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, onlydeactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-cation" function briefly.

Setting climate control to automaticX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To switch to manual mode: press theÉ orË button.

orX Press theK orI button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout. Automatic air distribution and airfloware deactivated.

Setting the temperature

Air-conditioning systemYou can set the temperature for the entirevehicle. The set temperature is automaticallymaintained at a constant level.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To increase/reduce: turn control:clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 133). Only change the temperaturesetting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides. The settemperature is automatically maintained at aconstant level.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheel:orE to the left or right (Y page 135). Only

Operating the climate control systems 139

Climatecontrol

change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air-conditioning system

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

vents

i You can also activate several air distribu-tion settings simultaneously. To do this,press multiple air distribution buttons. Theair is then directed through various vents.

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed if the adjusters are turned clockwiseuntil they engage.

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press one or more of theP,O,¯buttons.The corresponding indicator lamp lights upbriefly.

Dual-zone automatic climate control

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell ventsb Directs air through the defroster, cen-

ter and side air vents

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

_ Directs air through the defroster, cen-ter, side and footwell vents

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed if the adjusters are turned clockwiseuntil they engage.

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press theÉ orË button repeatedlyuntil the desired symbol appears in the dis-play.

Setting the airflow

Air-conditioning systemX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To increase/reduce: turn controlAclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 133).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To increase/reduce: press theK orI button.

Switching the ZONE function on/offThis function is only available with dual-zoneautomatic climate control.X To activate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is not adopted for the front-passengerside.

140 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

X To deactivate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the front-passengerside.

Defrosting the windshield

General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-shield and the side windows.

i You should only select the "Windshielddefrosting" function until the windshield isclear again.

Activating/deactivating the defrostingfunction for the windshieldX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode offi The "Windshield defrosting" functionautomatically sets the blower output to theoptimum defrosting effect. As a result, theairflow may increase or decrease automat-ically after the¬ button is pressed.

i You can adjust the blower output man-ually while the "Windshield defrosting"function is in operation:

RAir-conditioning system: turn airflowcontrolA counter-clockwise or clock-wise (Y page 133).RDual-zone automatic climate control:press theó orô button.

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Dual-zone climate control: press theÃbutton.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Air-conditioning system: turn temperaturecontrol: counter-clockwise or clockwise(Y page 133).Dual-zone automatic climate control: turntemperature control: orE counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 135).

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To deactivate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climate con-trol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Operating the climate control systems 141

Climatecontrol

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside

Air-conditioning systemX Activate the¿ "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Activate the¿ "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Set the air distribution toP orO.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches off auto-matically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-dow defroster may switch off.

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

142 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside the vehi-cle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, in particu-lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-lation mode briefly to prevent the windowsfrom fogging up.The operation of air-recirculation mode is thesame for all control panels.

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To activate: press thee button.The indicator lamp in thee button lightsup.

Dual-zone automatic climate control: air-recirculationmode is activated automatically:Rat high outside temperaturesRat high levels of pollutionWhen air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically, the indicator lamp in theebutton is not lit. Outside air is added afterabout 30 minutes.X To deactivate: press thee button.The indicator lamp in thee button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at out-side temperatures below approximately45 ‡ (7 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if the"Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at out-side temperatures above approximately45 ‡ (7 †) if the cooling with air dehu-midification function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notesThe residual heat function is only available invehicles for Canada with dual-zone automaticclimate control.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the vehiclefor approximately 30minutes after the enginehas been switched off. The heating timedepends on the set interior temperature.

i The blower will run at a low speed regard-less of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

i You cannot use the ventilation to cool thevehicle interior to a temperature lower thanthe outside temperature.

Operating the climate control systems 143

Climatecontrol

Switching on/offX Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 149).

X To activate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button goesout.

i Residual heat is deactivated automati-cally:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshieldand the hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,open the air vents completely and set theadjusters to the central position.

Setting the center air vents

X To open the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents: coun-ter-clockwise to position2.

X To close the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents: clock-wise as far as it will go to position3.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent3 Side air vent open4 Side air vent closedX To open a side air vent: turn the adjusterin side air vent; to the left in position3.

X To close a side air vent: turn the adjusterin side air vent; clockwise as far as it willgo to position4.

144 Air ventsClimatecontrol

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

: Rear-compartment air vent, left; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheelX To open or close: turn thumbwheel= upor down.i If the control panel in the front is switchedoff, no air can flow through the rear airvents.

Air vents 145

Climatecontrol

Z

146

Useful information ............................ 148Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 148Driving ............................................... 148DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi-cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) .................................................... 157DYNAMIC SELECT controller(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. 158Automatic transmission ................... 159Refueling ............................................ 169Parking ............................................... 171Driving tips ........................................ 174Driving systems ................................ 184

147

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and driv-ing safety systems adjusts automaticallywhile a certain distance is being driven afterthe vehicle has been delivered or afterrepairs. Full system effectiveness is notreached until the end of this teach-in proce-dure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi-cle and engine speeds for the first1000 miles (1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-tle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle isÔ of the way to the redarea of the tachometer.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the acceleratorpedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-down).RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),drive in program E.

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually and bringthe vehicle to full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG vehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.You should also observe these notes onbreaking-in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

148 DrivingDrivingandparking

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehi-cle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoidhigh engine speeds and driving at full throt-tle until the engine has reached its operat-ing temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: avoid full-loadoperation and engine speeds greater than5000 rpm when the engine is cold. This

helps to protect the engine and avoidsuncomfortable driving.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey(shift the transmission to position P)

1 Power supply for some consumers, suchas the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-Key for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

Start/Stop button

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped withSmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-ton.A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,when starting the engine.When you insert the Start/Stop button intothe ignition lock, the system needs approx-imately two seconds recognition time. Youcan then use the Start/Stop button.

Driving 149

Drivingandparking

Z

Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentkey positions in the ignition lock. This is onlythe case if you are not depressing the brakepedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted inthe ignition lock.Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 77).

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO.If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryou will not be able to start the engine withthe Start/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but-ton on the front door (Y page 84), you cancontinue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.The engine can be switched off while the vehi-cle is in motion by pressing and holding theStart/Stop button for three seconds. Thisfunction operates independently of the ECOstart/stop automatic engine switch-off func-tion.

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. Further information on situations wherean indicator lamp either fails to go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving(Y page 268).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the key beingremoved from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You cannow activate the windshield wipers, forexample.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhenin this position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button: twice.The ignition is switched on.If you press Start/Stop button: oncewhen in this position, the ignition isswitched off again.

Removing the Start/Stop buttonYou can remove the Start/Stop button fromthe ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-mal using the SmartKey.

150 DrivingDrivingandparking

You can only switch between Start/Stop but-ton mode and SmartKey operation when thevehicle is stationary.You must also engage park position P.X RemoveStart/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when you leavethe vehicle. You should, however, always takethe SmartKey with you when leaving the vehi-cle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment can beoperated

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator whenstarting the engine.

General notesDuring a cold start, the engine runs at higherspeeds to enable the catalytic converter toreach its operating temperature. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P(Y page 159).The transmission position display in themultifunction display showsP (Y page 159).

i You can start the engine in transmissionposition P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyTo start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of the Start/Stop button, pull theStart/Stop button out of the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-tion lock and release it as soon as theengine is running (Y page 149).

Driving 151

Drivingandparking

Z

Starting procedure with the Start/StopbuttonThe Start/Stop button can be used to startthe vehicle manually without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignitionlock and the SmartKeymust be in the vehicle.This mode for starting the engine operatesindependently of the ECO start/stop auto-matic engine start function.You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey isin the vehicle. Switch off the engine andalways take the SmartKey with you whenleaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it fora short time. Pay attention to the importantsafety notes.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 149).The engine starts.

Starting procedure via smartphoneObserve the important safety notes on start-ing the engine (Y page 151).You can also start your engine via your smart-phone from outside the vehicle. In this case,the previously selected climate control set-ting is activated. In this way you can cool orheat the interior of the vehicle before startingthe journey.Only start the engine via your smartphone if itis safe to start and run the engine where yourvehicle is parked.Observe the legal stipulations in the areawhere your vehicle is parked. Engine start viasmartphone may be limited to certain coun-tries or regions.You can execute a maximum of two consec-utive starting attempts via your smartphone.If you insert the key into the ignition lock, youcan carry out two more starting attempts.Once you have started the engine, you canswitch the engine off via your smartphone atany time.

You can only start the engine via your smart-phone if:Rthe key is in the ignition lockRpark position P is selectedRthe accelerator pedal is not depressedRthe anti-theft alarm system is not activatedRthe panic alarm is not activatedRthe hazard warning lamps are switched offRthe hood is closed.Rthe doors are closed and lockedRthe windows and sliding sunroof are closedAlso make sure that:Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filledRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

G WARNINGLimbs could be crushed or trapped if theengine is started unintentionally during ser-vice or maintenance work. There is a risk ofinjury.Always secure the engine against uninten-tional starting before carrying out mainte-nance or repair work.

Make sure that the engine cannot be startedvia your smartphone before carrying outmaintenance or repairs. You can prevent anengine start via your smartphone, for exam-ple, if you:Rswitch on the hazard warning lampsRdo not lock the doorsRopen the hood.

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.

152 DrivingDrivingandparking

When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pull-ing away.The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 230).It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position if youdepress the brake pedal. Only then can theparking lock be deactivated.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): if you do not depress the brake pedal,the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be movedbut the parking lock remains engaged.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you do notdepress the brake pedal, the selector levercan still be moved but the parking lockremains engaged.At transmission fluid temperatures belowÒ4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can only shift out of parkposition P into another transmission positionwhen the engine is running.

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Information on the automatic release of theelectric parking brake (Y page 173).

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Itholds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.Further information on holding the vehiclestationary on uphill gradients (Y page 163).

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-ped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

Driving 153

Drivingandparking

Z

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayThe ECO start/stop function is activatedwhenever you start the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button.If the engine has been switched off automat-ically by the ECO start/stop function, theè ECO symbol is shown in the multifunc-tion display.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive pro-gram C.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe off-road program is deactivated.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is stopped automatically.

TheHOLD function can also be activated if theengine has been switched off automatically. Itis then not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase.When you depress the accelerator pedal, theengine starts automatically and the brakingeffect of the HOLD function is deactivated.Automatic engine switch-off can take place amaximum of four times in a row (initial stop,then three subsequent stops)..

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO buttonRin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and the HOLD function isnot activeRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou move the transmission out of positionPRyou activate the off-road programRyou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too lowShifting the transmission to position P doesnot start the engine.

154 DrivingDrivingandparking

Deactivating or activating the ECOstart/stop function

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If the indicator lamp on the ECO button is off,the ECO start/stop function has been deac-tivated manually or as the result of a mal-function.

AMG performance exhaust system(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)You can choose between different AMG Per-formance exhaust system volumes using theposition of the exhaust flap.Each time you start the engine with theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the qui-etest setting is activated.

Setting the volume:X Press the: button.If you select the loudest setting, indicatorlamp; lights up.

The volume of the AMG Performance exhaustsystem can also be set using the DYNAMICSELECT controller (Y page 158).

Driving 155

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine does notstart.

The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 193) or DISTRONICPLUS (Y page 186).

X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lampsin the instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 151). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 331).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

156 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine is not run-ning smoothly and ismisfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-verter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The coolant tempera-ture gauge shows avalue above 248 ‡(120 †). The coolantwarning lamp may alsobe on and a warningtone may sound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 311). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehiclesexcept Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to changethe drive program. Depending on the driveprogram selected the following vehicle char-acteristics will change:Rthe drive (engine and transmission man-agement)Rthe steeringRthe availability of the ECO start/stop func-tionRthe climate control:Each time you start the engine with theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive pro-gram C is activated. For further informationabout starting the engine, see (Y page 151).

X PressDYNAMICSELECTbutton: asmanytimes as necessary until the desired driveprogram is selected.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display. After five secondsthe display goes out and the status icon ofthe selected drive program appears.In addition, the current drive program set-tings are displayed briefly in the Audio 20 orCOMAND display.i In a few countries, the ECO start/stopfunction is deactivated at the factory due tothe available fuel grade. In this case, theECO start/stop function is not available inany drive program, regardless of the displayin the Audio 20 or COMAND display.

DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 157

Drivingandparking

Z

Available drive programs:

C Comfort Comfortable and econom-ical driving characteristics

S Sport Sporty driving character-istics

I Individual Individual settings

Off-road Optimal driving character-istics for easily negotiableoff-road terrain

E Economy Particularly economicaldriving characteristics

Additional information for drive programs(Y page 164).You can also change gear yourself using thesteering wheel paddle shifters. For furtherinformation on the manual drive program(Y page 166).

DYNAMIC SELECT controller(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller tochange the drive program. Depending on thedrive program selected the following vehiclecharacteristics will change:Rthe driveRthe transmission managementRESP®Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG adap-tive sport suspension system)Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop func-tionRthe availability of gliding modeEach time you start the engine with theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive pro-gram C is activated. For further informationabout starting the engine, see (Y page 151).

X Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller: asmany times as necessary until the desireddrive program is selected.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display. After five secondsthe display goes out and the status icon ofthe selected drive program appears.The drive program indicator on DYNAMICSELECT controller: lights up in red.

Available drive programs:

I Individual Individual settings

C Comfort Comfort-oriented, opti-mum-economy engineand transmission settings

S Sport Sporty engine and trans-mission settings

S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty trans-mission settings

Race Maximum sportiness andengine and transmissionsettings suitable for theracetrack

Additional information for drive programs(Y page 164).You can also change gear yourself using thesteering wheel paddle shifters. For furtherinformation on the manual drive program(Y page 166).

158 DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Drivingandparking

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): the DIRECT SELECT lever is on the rightof the steering column.

For information on the selector lever inMercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 161).The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns toits original position. The current transmissionposition P, R, N or D appears in the transmis-sion position display in the multifunction dis-play (Y page 159).

Transmission position and drive pro-gram displayThe current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position; Gear= Drive program displayThe arrows in the transmission position dis-play show how and into which transmissionpositions you can shift using the DIRECTSELECT lever.If the transmission position display in themul-tifunction display is not working, you shouldpull away carefully to check whether thedesired transmission position is engaged.Ideally, you should select transmission posi-tion D and drive program E or S.

Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-cle is moving, do not shift the automatictransmission directly fromD toR, fromR toD or directly to P. The automatic transmis-sion could otherwise be damaged.

Automatic transmission 159

Drivingandparking

Z

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-tion of arrow P.Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.

When you have engaged park position P,make sure that the transmission position dis-play shows P in the multifunction display.You can only engage park positionPwhen thevehicle is stationary.Depressing the brake and pushing theDIRECT SELECT lever up or down disengagesthe parking lock. The transmission is in Nneutral.At transmission fluid temperatures belowÒ4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can only shift out of parkposition P into another transmission positionwhen the engine is running.In order to shift from park position P directlyinto R or D:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downpast the first point of resistance

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the Smart-Key and remove the SmartKeyRyou switch off the engine using the Smart-Key or using the Start/Stop button and

open the driver's door or front-passengerdoorRthe driver's door is opened when the vehi-cle is stationary or driving at very low speedand the transmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatictransmission shifts automatically to transmis-sion position P if the HOLD function orDISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Observe theinformation on the HOLD function(Y page 194) and on DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 189).

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission toRwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up past the first point ofresistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further infor-mation on the ECO start/stop function(Y page 154).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.

160 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downto the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up or down to the first point ofresistance.

If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.With the SmartKey: if you then open thedriver's door or the front-passenger door orremove the SmartKey from the ignition, theautomatic transmission shifts to P automati-cally.With the Start/Stop button: if you thenopen the driver's door or the front-passengerdoor, the automatic transmission shifts to Pautomatically.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutral N, e.g. when having thevehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwitha towing system:Using the SmartKey:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

With the Start/Stop button:X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever down pastthe first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever down past the first point ofresistance.

Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

Transmission position and drive pro-gram displayThe current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.

Automatic transmission 161

Drivingandparking

Z

: Transmission position display; Drive program displayIf the transmission position display in themul-tifunction display is not working, you shouldpull away carefully to check whether thedesired transmission position is engaged.Ideally, you should select transmission posi-tion D and drive program C or S.

Engaging park position P

X When the vehicle is stationary, press but-ton:.

Transmission positions

B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle from roll-ing away when stopped.Only shift the transmission intoposition P when the vehicle is sta-tionary (Y page 159). The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theelectronic parking brake in addi-tion to the parking lock in order tosecure the vehicle.If the vehicle electronics are mal-functioning, the transmission maybe locked in position P. Have thevehicle electronics checked imme-diately at a qualified specialistworkshop.Park position P is automaticallyengaged if:Ryou switch off the engine usingthe SmartKey and remove theSmartKeyRyou switch off the engine usingthe SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driv-er's door or front-passengerdoorRthe driver's door is opened whenthe vehicle is stationary or driv-ing at very low speed and thetransmission is in positionD or R

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission intoposition R when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

162 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:shift the transmission to positionNif the vehicle is in danger of skid-ding, e.g. on icy roads.If you switch the engine off with thetransmission in position R orD, theautomatic transmission shifts to Nautomatically.

! Rolling in neutralN can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shift-ing behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive programRthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

Holding the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients

G WARNINGIf the clutch overheats, the electronic man-agement system is automatically deactivated.This interrupts the power transmission. Thevehicle may, for example, roll backwards ongradients. There is a risk of an accident.Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients by depressing the accelerator.

The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehi-cle stationary on uphill gradients by depress-ing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch over-heats, a warning tone sounds.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): the Stop Vehicle Shift to PLeave Engine Running display messageappears in the multifunction display. You willonly be able to continue your journey once theclutch has cooled down and the display mes-sage in the multifunction display has disap-peared.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Trans. OilOverheated Drive on with Care displaymessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients by depressing the acceleratorpedal. Instead, only ever hold the vehicle sta-tionary on uphill gradients by:Rdepressing the brake pedalRactivating the HOLD functionRengaging the electric parking brake

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Automatic transmission 163

Drivingandparking

Z

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possibleto use kickdown in the automatic drive pro-gram and the temporary manual drive pro-gram M. When manual drive program M ispermanently activated, kickdown is not pos-sible.For further information on kickdown in man-ual drive program M (Y page 168).

Rocking the vehicle freeShifting the transmission repeatedly betweengearsD and Rmay help to free the vehicle if ithas become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi-cle's engine management system limits thespeed to amaximum of 5mph (9 km/h) whenshifting back and forth. To shift back and forthbetween transmission positions D and R,move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and downpast the point of resistance.

Drive programs

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMGvehicles)

Drive program C (Comfort)Drive program C is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economi-cal handling characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully.Rthe vehicle having improved driving stabil-ity, for example on slippery road surfaces.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. The vehicle is driven in the lowengine speed range and thewheels are lesslikely to spin.

Drive program S (Sport)Drive program S is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rsporty engine settings.Rthe automatic transmission shifting uplater. the fuel consumption possibly beinghigher as a result of the later automatictransmission shift points.

Drive program I (Individual)In drive program I the following properties ofthe drive program can be selected:Rthe drive (engine and transmission man-agement)Rthe steeringRthe availability of the ECO start/stop func-tionRthe climate control:Information about the configuration of driveprogram I with COMAND or Audio 20 can befound in the Digital Operator's Manual.

i To permanently select the gears in driveprogram I using the steering wheel paddleshifters, select the M (manual) setting forthe drive.

Off-road drive programThe Off-road drive program is characterizedby the following:Rthe vehicle exhibits optimal driving charac-teristics on easily negotiable off-road ter-rain.

Drive program E (Economy)Drive program E is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rcomfort-oriented engine settings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully.

164 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Rthe vehicle having improved driving stabil-ity, for example on slippery road surfaces.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin.Rgliding mode is activated automaticallywhen engine-internal conditions are fulfil-led and the accelerator is not depressed. Atthe same time the transmission’s clutchopens and the vehicle rolls freely using itskinetic energy. As a result great distancescan be completed without the engine brakeand fuel consumption reduced.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Drive program I (Individual)In drive program I the following properties ofthe drive program can be selected:Rthe drive (engine management)Rthe transmission managementRthe suspension (vehicles with AMG RIDECONTROL)RESP®

Information about the configuration of driveprogram I with COMAND or Audio 20 can befound in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Drive program C (Comfort)Drive program C is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economi-cal handling characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully.Rthe vehicle having improved driving stabil-ity, for example on slippery road surfaces.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. The vehicle is driven in the lowengine speed range and thewheels are lesslikely to spin.

Rgliding mode is available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is available.

Drive program S (Sport)Drive program S is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving charac-teristics.Rthe automatic transmission shifting uplater. the fuel consumption possibly beinghigher as a result of the later automatictransmission shift points.Rthe suspension exhibits stiff springing anddamping settings (vehicles with AIR RIDECONTROL).Rgliding mode is not available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is not availa-ble.

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driv-ing characteristics.Rthe automatic transmission shifting uplater.Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift points.Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiffspringing and damping settings (vehicleswith AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-tem).Rgliding mode is not available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is not availa-ble.

Drive program RACE (vehicles with AMGRIDE CONTROL)The RACE drive program is characterized bythe following:Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristicssuitable for the racetrack.Rall vehicle systems are set for maximumsportiness.

Automatic transmission 165

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe automatic transmission shifting uplater.Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift points.Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiffspringing and damping settings (vehicleswith AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-tem).Rgliding mode is not available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is not availa-ble.

Manual gear shifting

General notesYou can change gear yourself using the steer-ing wheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust be in position D.Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled,the automatic transmission immediatelyshifts into the next gear down or up, if per-mitted.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manualshifting, you have two options:Rtemporary settingRpermanent settingIf you activate manual gearshifting, the mul-tifunction display will show the current gearinstead of transmission position D.If manual gearshifting is deactivated, thegears will be selected automatically.

Temporary setting

X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT leverto position D.

X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter: or;.Temporary setting will be active for a certainamount of time. Under certain conditions theminimum amount of time is extended, e.g. inthe case of lateral acceleration, during anoverrun phase or when driving on steep ter-rain.X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddleshifter; and hold it in place.

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position.

orX All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): use the DYNAMIC SELECT button tochange the drive program.Mercedes-AMGvehicles: use theDYNAMICSELECT controller to change the drive pro-gram.

166 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMGvehicles)

X To activate: shift the selector lever to posi-tion P.

X Press button:.X To deactivate: press button:.orX If position D (automatic transmission) isselected for the transmission in drive pro-gram I: shift to drive program I with theDYNAMIC SELECT controller.

Shifting gears

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatictransmission does not shift up automati-cally even when the engine limiting speedfor the current gear is reached. When theengine limiting speed is reached, the fuelsupply is cut to prevent the engine fromoverrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddleshifter;.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMGvehicles): if themaximumengine speed onthe currently engaged gear is reached andyou continue to accelerate, the automatictransmission automatically shifts up inorder to prevent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddleshifter:.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine dam-age by not shifting down.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display.

Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

! The automatic transmission does not shiftup automatically even when the engine lim-iting speed for the current gear is reached.When the engine limiting speed is reached,the fuel supply is cut to prevent the enginefrom overrevving. Always make sure thatthe engine speed does not reach the red

Automatic transmission 167

Drivingandparking

Z

area of the tachometer. There is otherwisea risk of engine damage.

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-tifunction display.X Shift to recommended gear: when mes-sage; is shown in the multifunction dis-play.

KickdownX For maximum acceleration, depress theaccelerator pedal beyond the pressurepoint.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

During kickdown, you cannot shift gearsusing the steering wheel paddle shifters.If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-mission shifts up to the next gear when themaximum engine speed is reached. This pre-vents the engine from overrevving.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possibleto use kickdown in temporary manual driveprogramM. When manual drive programM ispermanently activated, kickdown is not pos-sible.

168 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger shifts into all ofthe gears.Reverse gear can nolonger be engaged.

The transmission is in emergency mode.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

Refueling 169

Drivingandparking

Z

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 377).

Refueling

General informationThe fuel filler flap is unlocked/locked auto-matically when you unlock/lock the vehiclewith the SmartKey.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayedæ in the instrument cluster. The arrow onthe filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-cle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table

= To insert the fuel filler cap? Instruction label for fuel type to be refu-

eledX Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver'sdoor.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder onthe inside of fuel filler flap=.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuelmay leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open,the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. Amessage appears in the multifunction display(Y page 252).In addition, the; Check Engine warninglamp may light up (Y page 275).For further information on warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see(Y page 275).

170 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 immediately and remove it(Y page 149).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can-not be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 76).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-med.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P andthe transmission position display mustshow P.Rthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the frontwheels must be turned towards the curb.

Parking 171

Drivingandparking

Z

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the electric parking brake.X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMGvehicles): shift the transmission to posi-tion P.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press but-ton:.

X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey toposition0 in the ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X With the Start/Stop button: press theStart/Stop button (Y page 149).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this cor-responds to SmartKey position1. When thedriver's door is open, this corresponds toSmartKey position 0: "SmartKey removed".

If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.With the SmartKey: if you then open thedriver's door or the front-passenger door orremove the SmartKey from the ignition, theautomatic transmission shifts to P automati-cally.With the Start/Stop button: if you thenopen the driver's door or the front-passengerdoor, the automatic transmission shifts to Pautomatically.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutral N, e.g. when having thevehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwitha towing system:Using the SmartKey:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

With the Start/Stop button:X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

If you attempt to turn off the engine when theselector lever is not in position P:Ramessage appears in themultifunction dis-playRa warning signal sounds

172 ParkingDrivingandparking

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunctionin the system, it may not be possible to applythe released parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it roll-ing away.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orthere is a malfunction in the system. Contacta qualified specialist workshop.The electric parking brake performs a func-tion test at regular intervals while the engineis switched off. The sounds that can be heardwhile this is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

X To engage: push handle:.When the electric parking brake is applied,the redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out.The electric parking brake can only bereleased:Rwhen the SmartKey is in position1 or2 inthe ignition lock (Y page 149) orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is automaticallyapplied when the transmission is in position Pand:Rthe engine is switched off orRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is opened.

To prevent the electric parking brake frombeing automatically applied, pull handle:.

Parking 173

Drivingandparking

Z

The electric parking brake is also engagedautomatically if:RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRthe HOLD function is keeping the vehiclestationaryRActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehiclestationary

In addition, at least one of the following con-ditions must be fulfilled:Rthere is a system malfunction.Rthe power supply is insufficient.Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthyperiod.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clustergoes out.The electric parking brake is not automati-cally engaged if the engine is switched off bythe ECO start/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyYour vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-matically released if all of the following con-ditions are met:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt has been fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in positionR, the tailgatemust be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission posi-tion P or you have previously driven fasterthan 2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the acceler-ator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise theparking brake will be released and the vehiclewill start to move.

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.X While driving, push handle:of the electricparking brake (Y page 173).The vehicle is braked as long as you keephandle: of the electric parking brakepressed. The longer the electric parkingbrake handle: is depressed, the greaterthe braking force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release Parking Brake messageappearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehiclemay suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only available

174 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the coun-try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-tions prohibit the driver from using a mobilephone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:RThe tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.RRemove unnecessary loads.RRemove roof racks when they are not nee-ded.RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.RHave all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and inhilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. Alwayshave work on the engine carried out at aqualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. Inparticular, work relevant to safety or onsafety-related systemsmust be carried out ata qualified specialist workshop.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

Driving tips 175

Drivingandparking

Z

ECO display

The ECO display provides feedback on howeconomical your driving characteristics are.The ECO display assists you in achieving themost economical driving style for the selec-ted settings and prevailing conditions. Yourdriving style can significantly influence thevehicle's consumption.The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationRConstantRCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and themean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higher percent-age indicates a more economical drivingstyle.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption. A fixed percentage countin the ECO display does not indicate a fixedconsumption.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRTire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:

RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera-tion processes):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstant (assessment of driving behaviorat all times)- The bar fills up: constant speed andavoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses)- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent brakingAn economical driving style specially requiresdriving at moderate engine speeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAcceleration and Constant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E(vehicles with a DYNAMIC SELECT button).

On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. onthe highway, only the bar for Constant willchange.The ECO display summarizes the driving char-acteristics from the start of the journey to itscompletion. For this reason, the bars changedynamically at the beginning of the journey.On longer journeys, there are fewer changes.For more dynamic changes, carry out a man-ual reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 222).

176 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting toa lower gear in good time. This allows you totake advantage of the engine's brakingeffect. For this, you need to have selectedmanual drive programM. This helps you toavoid overheating the brakes and wearingthem out excessively.When you take advantage of the engine'sbraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur-face. This could cause damage to the drivetrain. This type of damage is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal ondownhill gradients while the manual driveprogramM is temporarily activated: the auto-matic transmission may switch to the lastactive automatic drive program E or S. Theautomatic transmission may shift to a highergear. This can reduce the engine's brakingeffect.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, theremay be a delayed reac-tion from the brakeswhen braking for the firsttime. Thismay also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. Thiswill warmupthe brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, applythe brakes occasionally while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Driving tips 177

Drivingandparking

Z

Servicing the brakes

! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster andRyou hear a warning tone while the engineis running

Observe additional warning messages inthe multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immedi-ately. Consult a qualified specialist work-shop to arrange this.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a 2-axle dynamom-eter. If you wish to operate the vehicle onsuch a dynamometer, please consult aqualified specialist workshop in advance.You could otherwise damage the drive trainor the brake system.

! As the ESP® system operates automati-cally, the engine and the ignition must beswitched off (the SmartKeymust be in posi-tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if:Rthe electric parking brake is tested on abrake dynamometer (for a maximum often seconds)Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axleraised.

Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may seriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the function-ality of your brakes at regular intervals.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 66).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on your

vehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-cle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

Checking brake lining thicknessYou can measure the break pad/lining thick-ness using a test gage. Color-coding (green orred) on the test gage allows you to determinewhether the brake pad/lining thickness is stillsufficient. The test gage is in the vehicle docu-ment wallet in the glove box.

Front wheel

178 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Rear wheelX Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitableposition so that you can attach test gageA.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 171).

X Engage park position P.X Switch off the engine.X Place test gageA between the wheel'sspokes on brake pad/lining=.

X Hold test gageA vertically on brakedisc: and slide measuring pin; ontobrake disc:.

X Check which color field? the arrow onmeasuring pin; is pointing to.Green: the brake pad/lining thickness issufficient.Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is notsufficient. Have the brake pads/liningchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

To avoid an inaccurate measurement:Rmake sure you position the wheels suitablyRdo not put the measuring pin on a recess inthe brake disc

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling infront or in the opposite direction createwaves. This may cause the maximum per-missible water depth to be exceeded.Failure to observe these notesmay result indamage to the engine, electrical systemsand transmission.

If you have to drive on stretches of road onwhich water has collected, please bear inmind that:Rin the case of standing water, the waterlevel may be no higher than the lower edgeof the vehicle bodyRyou should drive no faster than at a walkingpace

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Driving tips 179

Drivingandparking

Z

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.X Try to bring the vehicle under control usingcorrective steering.

The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 343).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 342).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 342).

Off-road driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tirescould be damaged without the damagebeing visible. Components damaged in thisway can unexpectedly fail or, in the case ofan accident, no longer withstand the strainthey are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system, they can catchfire.

180 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If on con-tinuing your journey you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The vehicle is only designed for easily nego-tiable off-road terrain and poor road surfaces.When driving off-road, substances such assand, mud and water or water mixed with oilmay get into the brakes. This could result in areduced braking effect or in total brake failureand also in increasedwear and tear. The brak-ing characteristics change depending on thematerial ingressing the brakes. Clean thebrakes after driving off-road. If you detect areduced braking effect or grinding noises,have the brake system checked in a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible.Adapt your driving style to the different brak-ing characteristics.Driving off-road increases the likelihood ofdamage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can leadto failure of the mechanical assembly or sys-tems. Adapt your driving style to suit the ter-rain conditions. Drive carefully. Have damageto the vehicle rectified immediately at a quali-fied specialist workshop.Do not switch to transmission position Nwhen driving off-road. If you try to brake thevehicle using the service brake, you couldlose control of the vehicle. If the gradient istoo steep for your vehicle, drive back down inreverse gear.

General notes

H Environmental noteProtection of the environment is of primaryimportance. Treat nature with respect.Observe all prohibiting signs.

Read this section carefully before driving yourvehicle off-road.

Off-road driving is only possible with the Off-Road Engineering package (Y page 199).The following driving systems are speciallyadapted for driving over easily negotiable off-road terrain:ROff-road program (Y page 199)ROff-road ABS (Y page 66)ROff-road 4ETS (Y page 69)ROff-road ESP® (Y page 72)RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)(Y page 197)

Observe the following notes:RStop the vehicle before starting to drivealong an off-road route. If necessary, acti-vate the off-road program (Y page 157).RTo avoid damaging the vehicle, make surethere is always sufficient ground clearance.RCheck that items of luggage and loads arestowed safely and are well secured(Y page 285).RAlways keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving on a downhill gradient. Acti-vate DSR (Y page 197).RDrive slowly and evenly, if necessary at awalking pace.REnsure that the wheels are in contact withthe ground at all times.RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-road routes where visibility is poor. Forsafety reasons, get out of the vehicle firstand survey the off-road route.RCheck the depth of water before fordingrivers and streams.RWatch out for obstacles.RTake care when turning on an uphill ordownhill slope or when driving across aslope. The vehicle could otherwise tip over.RAlways keep the side windows and the pan-orama roof with power tilt/sliding panelclosed during the journey.RDo not deviate from marked routes.Do not use the HOLD function when drivingoff-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradientsor on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD

Driving tips 181

Drivingandparking

Z

function cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-faces.

Checklist before driving off-roadX Engine oil level: check the engine oil leveland add oil if necessary.When driving on steep gradients, theengine oil level must be sufficiently high toensure a correct oil supply in the vehicle.

X Wheels and tires: check the tire treaddepth and tire pressure.

X Check for damage and remove any foreignobjects, e.g. small stones, from thewheels/tires.

X Replace any missing valve caps.X Replace dented or damaged wheels.X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in aloss of tire pressure and damage the tirebead. Before driving off-road, check thewheels and replace them if necessary.

Checklist after driving off-road

! If you detect damage to the vehicle afterdriving off-road, have the vehicle checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Deactivate off-road program (Y page 157).X Deactivate DSR (Y page 197).X Clean the headlamps and rear lights andcheck for damage.

X Clean the front and rear license plates.X Clean the wheels and tires with a water jetand remove any foreign objects.

X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and thevehicle underside with a water jet; checkfor any foreign objects and damage.

X Check whether twigs or other parts ofplants have become trapped. Theseincrease the risk of fire and can damagefuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bel-lows of the axle joints and propeller shafts.

X After the trip, examine without fail theentire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes,

bodywork structure, steering, chassis andexhaust system for damage.

X After driving in sand, mud, gravel, water orsimilar dirty conditions, have the followingchecked and cleaned:Rbrake discsRwheelsRbrake padsRaxle joints

X If you detect strong vibrations after off-roadtravel, check for foreign objects in thewheels and drive train and remove them ifnecessary. Foreign objects can disturb thebalance and cause vibrations.

Driving over poor road surfaces placesgreater demands on your vehicle than drivingon normal roads. After driving off-road, checkthe vehicle. This allows you to detect damagepromptly and reduce the risk of an accident toyourself and other road users.

Driving on sandObserve the following rules when driving onsand:RActivate the off-road program(Y page 157).RAvoid high engine speeds.RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter to shift to a lower gear appropriateto the terrain.RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels couldbecome stuck in loose ground.RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if pos-sible. Make sure that:- the tire ruts are not too deep.- the sand is sufficiently firm.- the ground clearance of the vehicle issufficient.

Tire ruts and gravel roads

! Check that the ruts are not too deep andthat your vehicle has sufficient clearance.

182 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damagedor bottom out and get stuck.

Observe the following rules when drivingalong ruts in off-road terrain or on roads withloose gravel:RActivate the off-road program(Y page 157).RAvoid high engine speeds.RShift to a lower gear using the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter.RDrive slowly.RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with thewheels of one side on the center grassyarea, if possible.

Traveling uphill

Approach/departure angle

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

RObserve the warnings for off-road driving(Y page 180).RFollow the line of fall when driving on slopesand steep inclines.RBefore driving on extreme uphill and down-hill gradients, select the off-road program(Y page 157).RDrive slowly.RAccelerate gently and make sure that thewheels are gripping.RAvoid high engine speeds, except whendriving on sandy and muddy routes withhigh driving resistance.

RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter to shift to a lower gear appropriateto the gradient.RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter to shift into a lower gear in good timeon long and steep downhill gradients.

Hill start assist will aid you when pulling awayon a hill. For further information about hillstart assist, see (Y page 153).Do not switch to transmission position Nwhen driving off-road. If you try to brake thevehicle using the service brake, you couldlose control of the vehicle. If the gradient istoo steep for your vehicle, drive back down inreverse gear.Always observe the approach/departureangle values (Y page 384).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabilityAlways observe the maximum gradient climb-ing ability values (Y page 384).

HilltopsWhen driving up an uphill gradient, slightlyreduce pressure on the accelerator immedi-ately before reaching the brow of the hill.Make use of the vehicle's own impetus totravel over the brow.This style of driving prevents:Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on thebrow of a hillRthe vehicle from traveling too quickly downthe other side

Driving downhillRDrive slowly.RDo not drive at an angle down steepinclines. Steer into the line of fall and drivewith the front wheels aligned straight. Oth-erwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tipand rollover.RShift to a lower gear using the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter before tack-ling steep downhill gradients.

Driving tips 183

Drivingandparking

Z

RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brakegently. When doing so, make sure that thevehicle is facing in the direction of the lineof fall.RCheck that the brakes areworking normallyafter a long downhill stretch.

Off-road ABS is activated when the off-roadprogram is selected.At speeds below 18mph (30 km/h), the frontwheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig-ging-in effect achieved in the process reducesthe stopping distance on off-road terrain. Thesteerability of the vehicle is considerablyreduced if the wheels lock.

Driving systems

Cruise Control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select a low gear ingood time. You need to have previously selec-ted manual gearshifting M (Y page 166). Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).The speed indicated in the speedometer maydiffer slightly from the speed stored.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take into account the road,traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control

is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe electric parking brake must bereleased.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.

184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumedwhen the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling up thelast stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down? for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown? to the pressure point.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown? to the pressure point.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For exam-ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards=.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Rthe vehicle is secured with the electricparking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

trol Off message in the multifunction dis-play for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi-cles are detected with the aid of the radarsensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakesautomatically to avoid exceeding the setspeed or to maintain the designated distancefrom the vehicle in front.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is espe-cially important if the vehicle is laden. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre-vent a collision without your intervention. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehiclein front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.

186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-edly accelerate the vehicle to the storedspeed.

This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter laneor an exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-handlane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand laneRbe so highwhen driving in the left-hand lanethat you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsTo activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of the fol-lowing activation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must bereleased.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activa-ted.Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.

ActivatingX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, up: or downA.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up:or downA until the desired speed is set.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passivemes-sage appears in the multifunction display.The set distance to a slower-moving vehiclein front will then not bemaintained. Youwillbe driving at the speed you determine bythe position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is20 mph (30 km/h).

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and drivingThe vehicle can also pull away when it isfacing an unidentified obstacle or is driving ona different line from another vehicle. The vehi-cle then brakes automatically. Be ready tobrake at all times.If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.

X If you want to pull away withDISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot fromthe brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehi-cle accelerates to the set speed.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.In this way, the distance you have selected ismaintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.The vehicle is only accelerated up to thespeed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty drivingstyle when you select the S+ (Mercedes-AMGvehicles only) orS (Y page164) drive programor the manual gearshift (Y page 166). Accel-eration behind the vehicle in front or to the setspeed is then noticeablymore dynamic. If youhave selected theE (Mercedes-AMGvehicles:C) drive program, the vehicle acceleratesmore gently. This setting is recommended instop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 43 mph(70 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-tance to a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

188 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interruptedif changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicle infront becomes too small.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 190).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until itis stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstillat a sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance isset using the control on the cruise controllever.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, thetransmission is shifted automatically to posi-tion P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction in the electric parking brakeoccurs, then the transmission may also beshifted into position P automatically.

Setting a speed

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

press the cruise control lever up: ordown? to the pressure point.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown? to the pressure point.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds.With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 191).

i Make sure that you maintain the mini-mum distance to the vehicle in front asrequired by law. Adjust the distance to thevehicle in front if necessary.

X To increase: turn control= in direc-tion;.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control= in direc-tion:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryIf you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you willsee the DISTRONIC PLUS Offmessage in themultifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine. DISTRONICPLUSis not deactivated if you depress the accel-erator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or ifthe vehicle is automatically secured withthe electric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN position

190 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Ryou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle is skiddingRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multi-function display for approximately five sec-onds.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-ometer

WhenDISTRONICPLUS is activated and thereare no vehicles detected in front, one or twosegments; in the set speed range light up.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront= and stored speed: light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vatedIn the Assistance menu (Y page 227) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance display.

Assistance graphic: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicleX Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 227).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-tedYou will initially see the stored speed forabout five seconds when you activateDISTRONIC PLUS.

Assistance graphic: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only

appears when the cruise control lever isactuated)

Driving systems 191

Drivingandparking

Z

X Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 227).

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehiclemay brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehiclewill be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the

192 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

detected vehicle turns a corner and revealsan obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles thatare crossing your lane by mistake. ActivatingDISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with cross-ing traffic, for example, could cause your vehi-cle to pull away unintentionally.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function(Y page 194).

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastenedRthe electric parking brake is releasedRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivatedRthe transmission is in position D, R or N onvehicles with automatic transmission

Driving systems 193

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunction dis-play.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automati-cally if:Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatictransmission: only when the transmissionis in position D or R.Rthe transmission is in positionP on vehicleswith automatic transmission.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure until: disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electricparking brake.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

When the HOLD function is activated, thetransmission is shifted automatically to posi-tion P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if the HOLD function is activa-ted when the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

Start-off assist (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you use start-off assist, individual wheelsmay start to spin and the vehicle may skid. IfESP® is deactivated, there is a greater dangerof skidding and having an accident.Make surethat no persons or obstacles are in the vicinityof the vehicle.

Start-off assist enables optimumaccelerationfrom a standstill. For this, a suitably high-griproad surface is required, along with the tiresand vehicle being in proper operating condi-tion.Do not activate start-off assist on publicroads.Observe the safety notes on driving safetysystems (Y page 65).Be sure to read the safety notes and informa-tion on ESP® (Y page 69).

Activating start-off assistX Deactivate ESP® (Y page 227).X Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position.

194 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Depress the brake pedal firmly with yourleft foot and keep the brake pedaldepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D.X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to selectthe S drive program (Y page 157).

X Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully.X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel-eration.i Activate ESP® as soon as the accelerationprocess has ended. ESP®will otherwise notbe able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehiclestarts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

Canceling start-off assistX Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.

X Reactivate ESP.

RACE START (AMG vehicles)

Important safety notes

i RACE START must not be used on normalroads. RACE START must only be activatedand used on dedicated road circuits, out-side of public road use.

i RACE START is only available inMercedes‑AMG vehicles.

G WARNINGIf you use RACE START, individual tires maystart to spin and the vehicle could skid.Depending on the selected ESP® mode, thereis an increased risk of skidding and having anaccident. Make sure that no persons, animalsor obstacles are within range of the vehicle.

RACE START enables optimal accelerationfrom a standing start. For this, a suitably high-grip road surface is required, along with thetires and vehicle being in proper operatingcondition.

i Observe the safety notes on driving safetysystems (Y page 65).Be sure to read the safety notes and infor-mation on ESP® (Y page 69).

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors, hood and the trunk lid areclosed.Rthe engine is running and the transmission,all-wheel drive clutch and the engine are atoperating temperature.Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition.Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brakepedal is depressed (left foot).Rthe transmission is in position D.Rdrive program S, S+ or RACE is selected(Y page 158).

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Pull and hold both steering wheel paddleshifters.

X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UPCancel: Paddle DOWN message appearsin the multifunction display.

X Release both steering wheel paddle shift-ers.i If the activation conditions are no longerfulfilled, RACE START is canceled. TheRACE START Not Possible See Opera‐tor's Manual message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel pad-dle shifter (Y page 166).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheelpaddle shifter (Y page 166).The RACE START Available Depressgas pedal message appears in the multi-function display.

Driving systems 195

Drivingandparking

Z

i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal within a few seconds, RACE START iscanceled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START Canceled message.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed is increased.The RACE START Release brake tostart message appears in the multifunc-tion display.i If you do not release the brake pedalwithin a short time, RACE START will becanceled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START Canceled message.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel-eration.The RACE START Activemessage appearsin the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h.RACE START is deactivated immediately ifyou release the accelerator pedal duringRACE START or if any of the activation condi-tions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE STARTNot Possible or RACE START Canceledmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly within ashort period of time, it is only availableagain after the vehicle has been driven acertain distance.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-tem

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.

The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection of Sport or Com-fort mode.

The suspension setting is adjusted using thecorresponding button in the center console.

i The mode can also be set using the AMGDYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 158).

Each time you start the engine with the igni-tion key or the Start/Stop button, Comfortmode is activated. For further informationabout starting the engine, see (Y page 151).

Sport mode

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning inSport mode ensures even better contact withthe road. Select this mode when employing asporty driving style, e.g. on winding countryroads.X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. You have selec-ted Sport mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORTmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Comfort modeIn Comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable. Selectthis mode if you favor a more comfortabledriving style, but also when driving fast onstraight roads, e.g. highways.

196 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Press button: again so that indicatorlamp; goes out.You have selected Comfort mode.The AMG Suspension System COMFORTmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

4MATIC! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the differential.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheelsmust remain either on the ground orbe fully raised. Observe the instructions fortowing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

4MATIC, together with ESP®, improves thetraction of your vehicle whenever a drivewheel spins due to insufficient grip.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannottake account of road, weather and traffic con-ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.

i In wintry driving conditions, themaximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

DSR

General notes

i DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is onlyavailable for vehicles with the Off-RoadEngineering package.

DSR is an aid to assist youwhen driving down-hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speedselected on the on-board computer. Thesteeper the downhill gradient, the greater theDSR braking effect on the vehicle. When driv-ing on flat stretches of road or on an uphillgradient, the DSR braking effect is minimal ornonexistent.DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it isactivated and the transmission is in positionD, R orN. You can drive at a higher or a lowerspeed than that set on the on-board computerat any time by accelerating or braking.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the speed driven and the set speed deviateand you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-face, the wheelsmay lose traction. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Before switching DSR on, please take intoconsideration the road surface and the differ-ence between driving speed and the setspeed.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR canneither reduce the risk of accident nor over-ride the laws of physics. DSR cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic condi-tions. DSR is only an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, forvehicle speed, for braking in good time and forstaying in your lane.You are always responsible for keeping con-trol of the vehicle and for assessing whetherthe downhill gradient can be managed. DSRmay not always be able to keep to the setspeed, depending on road surface and tireconditions. Select a set speed suitable for theprevailing conditions and when necessary,apply the brakes manually.Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 180).

Driving systems 197

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating/deactivating DSRIf you activate DSR and no speed has beenset, the vehicle decelerates to 3 mph(6 km/h).You can only activate DSR when driving atspeeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

Activating DSRX Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.The status indicator in the multifunctiondisplay shows, e.g. DSR 6 km/h.

If the current vehicle speed is too high, theDSR icon appears in the multifunction dis-play. You will also see the message: Max.Speed 30 km/h .If you enter or exit a parking space usingActive Parking Assist, and press button:,indicator lamp; flashes. DSR can then notbe switched on.Deactivating DSRX Press button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.The DSR symbol appears in the multifunc-tion display with the Off message.

DSR switches off automatically if you drivefaster than 22 mph (35 km/h). The DSR sym-bol appears in the multifunction display withthe Off message. You also hear a warningtone.

Display in the assistance graphic

X Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 227).When DSR is activated symbol: appearsin the assistance graphics display.

Changing the set speed while the vehi-cle is in motion

When DSR is activated, you can change theset speed to a value between 2 mph and11 mph (Canada: between 4 km/h and18 km/h) while the vehicle is in motion.X To increase or decrease in 1 mph incre-ments (Canada: 1 km/h increments):briefly press the cruise control lever to thepressure point, up: for a higher set speedor down; for a lower set speed.The set value appears in the status indica-tor of the multifunction display.

198 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Chassis with adaptive adjustabledamping

General notesSuspension with the Adaptive Damping Sys-tem provides improved driving comfort andcontinuously controls the calibration of thedampers. The damping characteristics adaptto the current operating and driving situation.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface conditionsRthe drive program selectedRthe vehicle level settingThe drive program can be set using theDYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 157).

Selecting Comfort modeIn the Comfort drive program, the drivingcharacteristics of your vehicle are more com-fortable. Therefore, select this mode if youfavor a more comfortable driving style. Alsoselect the Comfort drive program when driv-ing fast on straight roads, e.g. on straightstretches of highway.X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button:(Y page 157) as many times as necessaryuntil the Comfort drive program is selec-ted.

Selecting Sport modeThe firmer setting of the suspension tuning inthe Sport drive program ensures even bettercontact with the road. Select this drive pro-

gram when employing a sporty driving style,e.g. on winding country roads.DSR is not available in the Sport drive pro-gram. For further information on DSR, see(Y page 197).X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button:(Y page 157) as many times as necessaryuntil the Sport drive program is selected.

Selecting Off-road mode

i The Off-road program is only available onvehicles with the Off-road package.

The engine’s performance characteristicsand the gearshifting characteristics of theautomatic transmission are adapted for theOff-road drive program. ABS, ESP® and ETSprograms especially adapted to off-road driv-ing are also activated. Select this drive pro-gram when driving in easily negotiable off-road terrain, e. g. dirt tracks.Do not use the off-road programon roads thatare snow-covered or icy or if you have moun-ted snow chains on your vehicle.X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button:(Y page 157) as many times as necessaryuntil the Off-road drive program is selec-ted.Status icon: of the off-road program isshown in the multifunction display.

Driving systems 199

Drivingandparking

Z

Displaying the assistance graphicX Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 227).When the off-road program is activated,symbol: appears in the assistancegraphic display.

Driving dynamics display (vehicleswith Off-Road Engineering package)

General notesThe driving dynamics display allows you tosee the selected drive program and additionalinformation about the vehicle's operating sta-tus in the Audio 20 or COMAND display.Vehicles with Audio 20:RDrive program selectedRAngle of inclinationRSteering angleRUphill or downhill gradient in percentageRDSR status indicatorVehicles with COMAND:RDrive program selectedRAccelerator pedal position shown in %RBrake pedal position shown in %RAngle of inclinationRSteering angleRUphill or downhill gradient in percentageRLevel controlRCompass with angle scaleRDSR status indicator

Activating the driving dynamics display

X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see theseparate Audio 20 or COMAND operatinginstructions.

X Press button:.The driving dynamics display appears in theAudio 20 or COMAND display.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the areaaround your vehicle using six sensors in thefront bumper and six sensors in the rearbumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediatesurroundings. You are always responsible forsafe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-ing space. When maneuvering, parking orpulling out of a parking space, make sure thatthere are no persons, animals or objects inthe area in which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.

200 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the electric parking brake

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-ing loads, truck overhangs or loadingramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 317).

Range

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.

Driving systems 201

Drivingandparking

Z

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of thevehicle

; Segments on the right-hand side of thevehicle

= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area is loca-ted on the headliner in the rear compartment.The warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellowsegments showing operational readiness=light up.

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rolling back-wards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.

From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; Deactivating/activating PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position2 inthe ignition lock.

202 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and theindicator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 317).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. It measures the road onboth sides of the vehicle. A parking symbolindicates a suitable parking space. Activesteering intervention and brake applicationcan assist you during parking and when exit-ing a parking space. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 200).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Make sure thatno persons, animals or objects are in themaneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, ActiveParking Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not at asharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable forparking, for example:RWhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRIn front of driveways or entrances and exitsROn unsuitable surfaces

Driving systems 203

Drivingandparking

Z

Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park-ing space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or over-grown might be identified or measuredincorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupiedby trailer drawbars might not be identifiedas such or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 202) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active ParkingAssist will then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of the vehi-cle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to thedirection of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.not on the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and deactivate Active ParkingAssist.

For further information on the detectionrange (Y page 201).Active Parking Assist does not assist youparking in spaces at right angles to the direc-tion of travel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directlynext to one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not assist youparking in spaces that are parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space asbeing blocked, for example by foliage orgrass paving blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle tomaneuver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

Example: parking symbol: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the right

204 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Active Parking Assist is switched on automat-ically when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, thesystem independently locates and measuresparking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to thedirection of travelRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 39.5 in (1.0m) longer than yourvehicleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) widerthan your vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the length of a parking space if itis at right angles to the direction of travel.You will need to judge whether your vehiclewill fit into the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol; asa status indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right or the left alsoappears. By default, Active Parking Assistonly displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv-er's side are displayed as soon as the turnsignal on the driver's side is activated. Whenparking on the driver's side, this must remainactivated until you confirm the use of ActiveParking Assist by pressing thea button onthe multifunction steering wheel. The systemautomatically determines whether the park-ing space is parallel or at right-angles to thedirection of travel.A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you are approx-imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the vehicle when it is only beingbraked by Active Parking Assist it could rollaway if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always secure itagainst rolling away.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You are respon-sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake atall times.When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

Driving systems 205

Drivingandparking

Z

Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can-celed.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill when the vehicle approachesthe rear border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight park-ing spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select DObserve Surroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill when the vehicle approachesthe front border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight park-ing spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select RObserve Surroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.As soon as the parking procedure is com-plete, the Park Assist Switched Offmes-sage appears and a warning tone sounds. Thevehicle is now parked.The vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal. Thebraking effect is canceled when you depressthe accelerator pedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brake appli-cations. When Active Parking Assist is fin-ished, you must steer and brake again your-self. PARKTRONIC is still available.

Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include the posi-tion and shape of the vehicles parked infront and behind it and the conditions of thelocation. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the curb. If necessary, you should can-cel the parking procedure with Active Park-ing Assist.RYou can also select preselect transmissionposition D. The vehicle redirects and doesnot drive as far into the parking space.Should the transmission change take placetoo early, the parking procedure will becanceled. A sensible parking position canno longer be achieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can sup-port you when you exit the parking space:Ryou need to have parked using Active Park-ing Assist.Rthe border of the parking space must behigh enough at the front and the rear. Acurb is too small, for example.Rthe border of the parking spacemust not betoowide, as the position of the vehiclemustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the startingposition as it is maneuvering into the park-ing space.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParking Assist brakes automatically whilstthe vehicle exits the parking space. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

206 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Start the engine.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the turn signal in the directionyou will drive out of the parking space.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:message appears in the multifunction dis-play%.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To exit a parking space using ActiveParking Assist: press thea button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times.Do not exceed a maximum speed ofapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exit-ing a parking space. Otherwise Active Park-ing Assist will be canceled.

X Depending on the message or as required,shift the transmission to position D or R.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistActive Accelerate and BrakeObserve Surroundingsmessage appearsin the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone andthe Park Assist Finished messageappears in the multifunction display. You will

then have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available. Youcan take over the steering, before the vehiclehas exited the parking space completely. Thisis useful, for example when you recognizethat it is already possible to pull out of theparking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistX Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled atonce. The Park Assist Canceled mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button(Y page 202).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately canceled.The Park Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automati-cally if:Rthe electric parking brake is engagedRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is nolonger possibleRyou are driving faster than6mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷ warning lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster

A warning tone sounds. The parking symboldisappears and the multifunction displayshows the Park Assist Canceled mes-sage.When Active Parking Assist is canceled, youmust steer and brake again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Driving systems 207

Drivingandparking

Z

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to showthe area behind your vehicle in the Audio/COMAND display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the Audio/COMANDdisplay depends on the language setting.The following are examples of rear viewcamera messages in the Audio/COMANDdisplay.

Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 318).

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering and parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking,make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in the areain which you are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rif the tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)

Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 318)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of therear view camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of the vehi-cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by Rgear function is selected in Audio 20/COMAND; see the Digital Operator's Man-ual.

X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown withguide lines in the Audio 20/COMAND dis-play.The image from the rear view camera isavailable throughout the maneuveringprocess.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission toP or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the Audio 20/COMAND dis-playThe rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

208 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicles with PARKTRONIC: whenPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 202),additional measurement operational readi-ness indicator; appears in the Audio 20/COMAND display. If the PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are active or light up, warningdisplays: and= are also active or light upcorrespondingly in the Audio 20/COMANDdisplay.

Driving systems 209

Drivingandparking

Z

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

? Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 208).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, care-fully back up until you reach the end posi-tion.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost paral-lel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 208).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the park-ing space until yellow guide line; reachesparking space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand back up carefully.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

210 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.Thewhite lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possi-ble.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-tion while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reachedthe final position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.

Wide-angle function

: Symbol for the wide-angle view function; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysSelect this viewwhen you are driving out of anexit and the view of crossing traffic is restric-ted, for example.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTEN-TIONASSIST detects typical indicators of fati-gue or increasing lapses in concentration onthe part of the driver, it suggests taking abreak.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.

Driving systems 211

Drivingandparking

Z

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less thanapproximately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-face is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slowerthan 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than125 mph (200 km/h)Rif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-tinue your journey and starts assessing yourtiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis-played in the assistance menu (Y page 227)of the on-board computer.X Select the Assistance display for AttentionAssist using the on-board computer(Y page 227).

The following information is displayed:Rlength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined by ATTEN-TION ASSIST (Attention Level), dis-played in a bar display in five levels fromhigh to lowRif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot issue awarn-ing, the System Suspended messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speedbelow37mph (60 km/h) or above 124mph(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 228).The system determines the attention levelof the driver depending on the settingselected:

If Standard is selected: the sensitivity withwhich the system determines the attentionlevel is set to normal.If Sensitive is selected: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected by Atten-tion Assist is adapted accordingly and thedriver is warned earlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay in the assistance graphic display.When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactiva-ted, it is automatically reactivated after theengine has been stopped. The sensitivityselected corresponds to the last selectionactivated (standard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra-tion are detected, a warning appears in themultifunction display: ATTENTION ASSISTTake a Break!.In addition to the message shown in the mul-tifunction display, you will then hear a warn-ing tone.

212 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break and ATTENTION ASSISTstill detects increasing lapses in concentra-tion, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest. This will only hap-pen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration.If a warning is output in the multifunction dis-play, a service station search is performed inCOMAND. You can select a service stationand navigation to this service station will thenbegin. This function can be activated anddeactivated in COMAND.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 213) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 215).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist monitors the areas on eitherside of the vehicle that are not visible to thedriver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrorsdraws your attention to vehicles detected inthe monitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lane, youwill also receive an optical and audible warn-ing.Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speedof approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the rear bumper. Make surethat the bumpers are free from dirt, ice orslush. The sensors must not be covered, forexample by cycle racks or overhanging loads.Following a severe impact or in the event ofdamage to the bumpers, have the function ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may nolonger work properly.

Driving systems 213

Drivingandparking

Z

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain or snowRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbike or bicycleRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assistmonitors the area up to 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if the vehicles are driving on the innerside of their lane.

Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

Warning display

: Warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica-tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

214 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activa-ted in the on-board computer(Y page 228).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of multifunc-tion camera: which is attached behind thetop of the windshield. Active Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflection from other vehicles(e.g. if the road surface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction work

Driving systems 215

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standardor Adaptive (Y page 228).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 227) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.

When Standard is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

When Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a free-way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

216 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Useful information ............................ 218Important safety notes ..................... 218Displays and operation ..................... 218Menus and submenus ...................... 221Display messages ............................. 235Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 266

217

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore make

sure your vehicle is operating safely at alltimes.If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to doso. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 31).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness of themultifunction display. In daylight, the displaysin the instrument cluster are not illuminated.The lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicle inte-rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-trol knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 31).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwiseor counter-clockwise.If the light switch is set to theÃ,T orL position, the brightness is dependentupon the brightness of the ambient light.

Speedometer with segmentsThe speedometer is divided into segmentsonly on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.The segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 186):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in frontthat is driving at a slower speed than thestored speed:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

218 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The engine is limited within a range to protectthe engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Bear in mind that the outside temperaturedisplay indicates the temperature measuredand does not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in themul-tifunction display (Y page 221).There is a short delay before a change in out-side temperature appears in the multifunc-tion display.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-ment cluster on the right-hand side(Y page 31).

Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolant tem-perature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Displays and operation 219

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects theprevious or next station, whenthe preset list or station list isactive, or an audio track or videosceneRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the Audiomenu: selects a pre-set list or a station list in thedesired frequency range or anaudio track or video scene usingrapid scrollingRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms the selection or displaymessageRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumber

% Press briefly:RBackRVehicles with Audio 20: switchesoff voice-operated control of thenavigation (see manufacturer'soperating instructions)RVehicles with COMAND:switches off the Voice ControlSystem (see the separate oper-ating instructions)RHides display messages or callsup the last Trip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe Trip menu

Right control panel

ó RVehicles with Audio 20:Switches on voice-operated con-trol for navigation (see manufac-turer's operating instructions)RVehicles with COMAND:Switches off the Voice ControlSystem (see the separate oper-ating instructions)

8 RMute

WX

RAdjusts the volume

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

220 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Multifunction display

: Permanent display: outside temperatureor speed (Y page 230)

; Time= Text field? Menu barA Drive program (Y page 159)B Transmission position (Y page 161)In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, the indicators inthe lower and upper part of the multifunctiondisplay differ from the displays shown here.X To display menu bar?: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.If you do not press the buttons any longer,menu bar? is faded out after a few sec-onds.Text field= shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.

i Set the time using Audio 20 or COMAND(see the separate operating instructions).

The following messages may appear inthe multifunction display:RZGearshift recommendation, when shiftingmanually (Y page 166)Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 203)RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 184)Rè ECO start/stop function(Y page 154)

Rë HOLD function (Y page 193)RDSR Downhill Speed Regulation(Y page 197)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewUsing the= or; button on the steer-ing wheel, open the menu bar.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 219).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 221)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 223)RAudio menu (Y page 225)RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 226)RDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 227)RServ. menu (Y page 229)RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 229)RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)(Y page 231)

The displays for the Audio, Navi and Telmenus may differ slightly to those in yourvehicle.The examples given in this Operator's Manualapply to vehicles equipped with COMAND.

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the Trip menu with

Menus and submenus 221

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

trip odometer: and odometer;appears.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Distance; Driving time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom Start or From Reset.

The values in the From Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 223).In the following cases, the trip computer isautomatically reset From Start:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.When 9,999 hours or 99,999miles have beenexceeded, the trip computer is automaticallyreset From Reset.ECO display

The ECO display is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectECO DISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 176).

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu onlyshows range:.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press9 or: to select the displaywith approximate range: and current fuelconsumption;.Approximate range: that can be coveredis calculated according to your current driv-ing style and the amount of fuel in the tank.If there is only a small amount of fuel left inthe fuel tank, a vehicle being refueledCappears instead of approximate range:.Recuperation display= shows you ifenergy has been recuperated from thekinetic energy in overrun mode and savedin the battery. Recuperation display=depends on the engine installed and istherefore not available in all vehicles.

222 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Digital speedometer

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer;.A gear shift recommendation: Z can alsofollow.Observe the information on gearshift rec-ommendation: when shifting manually(Y page 166).Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift rec-ommendation is shown in the status bar ofthemultifunction display and not in the dig-ital speedometer display.

Resetting values

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Pressa to confirm.X Select: Yes and pressa to con-firm.

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO display

If you reset the values in the ECO display, thevalues in the "From Start" trip computer arealso reset. If you reset the values in the "FromStart" trip computer, the values in the ECOdisplay are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.Additional information on navigation can befound in the separate Audio 20 or COMANDoperating instructions.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND, see theseparate operating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Menus and submenus 223

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Change of direction without lane recom-mendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is to bemade, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indi-cator shortens towards the top of the displayas you approach the point of the announcedchange of direction. The change of directionstarts once the distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lanes not recommended? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of directionA Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, new lane recommenda-tions can be displayed for the next change ofdirection if the digital map supports this data.During the change of direction, new lanesmay be added.

Lane not recommended=: you will not beable to complete the next change of directionif you stay in this lane.Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction?: in this lane you will beable to complete the next two changes ofdirection without changing lane.

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

The navigation system displays additionalinformation and the vehicle status.Possible displays:RNew Route... or Calculating Route...A new route is calculated.RRoad Not MappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigital map but the road is not recognized,e.g. newly built streets, car parks or privateland.RNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selec-ted destination.RO

You have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.

224 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Active station list; Station frequency with memory positionThe multifunction display shows station;with station frequency or station name. Thepreset position is only displayed along withstation; if this has been stored.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND and selectRadio; see the separate operating instruc-tions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select a preset list or station list:press and briefly hold the9 or:button until the preset list or station list inthe desired frequency range is shown.

X To select a station: briefly press9or:.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.You can find further information on opera-tion in the "Satellite radio" section of theseparate Audio 20 or COMAND operatinginstructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

: Current title

Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND and selectaudio CD or MP3 mode; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired track appears.If you press and hold9 or:, therapid scrolling speed is increased. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.

Video DVD operation

You can only operateDVD videos in the Audiomenu in vehicles with COMAND.X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD(see the separate operating instructions).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select the next or previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene:appears.

Menus and submenus 225

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the man-ufacturer’s operating instructions).

X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND, see theseparate operating instructions.

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to Audio20 or COMAND, see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Tel menu.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the mul-tifunction display.You can accept a call at any time, even if youare not in the Tel menu.X Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a callYou can end or reject a call anytime, even ifyou are not in the Tel menu.X Press the~ button on the steeringwheel to reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone bookX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Authorize access to the phone book on thephone.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and holdthe9 or: button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: pressthe~ or% button.

226 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: pressthe~ or% button.

Assistance menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theDriveAssist menu:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 227)RActivating/deactivating ESP® (exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 227)RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 228)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSIST (Y page 228)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist(Y page 228)RActivating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 228)

Displaying the assistance graphic

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select AssistanceGraphic.

X Pressa to confirm.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.The assistance graphic displays the statusof and information from the following driv-ing systems or driving safety systems:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 66)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 211)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 215)RDSR (Y page 197)ROff-road program (Y page 199)RRear window wiper (Y page 126)

X Press: to display the ATTEN-TION ASSIST assessment.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Observe the important safety notes on ESP®(Y page 69).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

Menus and submenus 227

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelDeactivating/activating ESP® in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 70).For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 69).X Start the engine.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select ESP.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.ESP® is deactivated if the å warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.

If the ÷ and å warning lamps light upcontinuously, ESP® is not available due to amalfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 271).Observe the information on displaymessages(Y page 236).

Activating/deactivating COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUSX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectCollision Prevent. Assist.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS is deactivated, theæ symbolappears in the multifunction display in theassistance graphic display.

For further information about COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 66).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectAttention Assist.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set Off,Standard or Sensitive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,theé symbol appears in the multifunc-tion display in the assistance graphics dis-play.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 211).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot Assist.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 213).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectLane Keeping Assist.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

228 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

X Pressa again to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set Off,Standard or Adaptive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, themultifunction display shows the lane mark-ings as bright lines in the assistancegraphic.

For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 215).

Service menu

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theServ. menu:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 235)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Canada only) (Y page 347)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(USA only) (Y page 348)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 313)

Settings menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, in the Sett. menu you have the fol-lowing options:RChanging the instrument cluster settingsRChanging the light settingsRChanging the vehicle settingsRChanging the convenience settingsRRestoring the factory settings

Instrument cluster

Selecting the distance unitThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whether cer-tain displays appear in kilometers or miles inthe multifunction display.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion.You will see the selected setting: km ormiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:Rdigital speedometer in the Trip menuROdometer and the trip odometerRTrip computerRcurrent fuel consumption and approximaterangeRNavigation instructions in the Navi menuRCruise ControlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometeron/offIf the additional speedometer is switched on,the speed is shown in the status area of the

Menus and submenus 229

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

multifunction display instead of the outsidetemperature.The speed display is inverse to the speedom-eter.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theSpeedometer [km/h] or Speedometer[mph] function.You will see the selected setting: On or Off.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Selecting permanent displayThe Permanent Display: function allowsyou to choose whether the multifunction dis-play always shows the outside temperature orthe speed.The speed display is inverse to the speedom-eter.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.The current setting Outside Temperatureor Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer[mph] appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Lights

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offThis function is not available in Canada.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

X Press the: or9 button to select theDaytime Running Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights functionhas been switched on, the multifunctiondisplay shows the cone of light and theW symbol in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 116).

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic Door Lock function.If the Automatic Door Lock function isswitched on, the multifunction displayshows the doors in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.If you activate the Automatic door locksfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).For further information on the automatic lock-ing feature, see (Y page 84).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

230 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the multifunction display shows the&symbol in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Convenience

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offThis function is only available in Canada.This function is only available when the vehi-cle is equippedwith the electrical fold-in func-tion.When you activate the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ing function, the exterior mirrors are foldedinwhen the vehicle is locked. If you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold outagain.If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorFolding function and you fold in the exteriormirrors using the button on the door(Y page 109), they will not fold out automat-ically. The exterior mirrors can then only befolded out using the button on the door.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isswitched on, the multifunction displayshows the exterior mirror in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? functionappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select Noor Yes.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.If you have selected Yes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningLights function in the Light submenu is onlyreset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

WARMUP

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Transmission fluid temperatureX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMG menu.Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP =indicates that the engine has reached theoverrevving rangewhen in themanual driveprogram.Engine and transmission oil tempera-ture: when the engine and transmissionare at normal operating temperature, oiltemperature? andB are displayed inwhite in the multifunction display.If the multifunction display shows oil tem-perature? orB in blue, the engine or thetransmission are not yet at normal operat-

Menus and submenus 231

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

ing temperature. Avoid driving at full engineoutput during this time.

SETUP

: Drive Comfort/Sport/Sport +; Chassis Comfort/Sport/Sport += Transmission D/M? ESP® On/Off or SPORT handling mode

SportSETUP displays the following information andfunctions:Rthe digital speedometerRthe gear indicatorRthe drive system settingRthe suspension modeRthe transmission positionRthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) sta-tus

X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMG menu.

X Press9 repeatedly until SETUPappears.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

: Lap; RACETIMER

The RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-tion 2 in the ignition lock.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER appears.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. Time.

X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time appears for five sec-onds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum of six-teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com-pleted with Finish Lap.

232 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steeringwheel.

X Confirm Yes witha.The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stopthe vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key toposition 3 and then pressa to confirmStart, timing is continued.Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset Lap.

X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm Reset.Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multi-function display.

X Press the: button to select Yes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speedThis function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation appears.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lap

Menus and submenus 233

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

This function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press9 repeatedly until a lap evalua-tion appears.Each lap appears in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

234 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.Please respond in accordancewith the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 193)RParking (Y page 171)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel.The multifunction display hides the display message.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-play messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-sages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages in themessagememory. You can callup the display messages:X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 235

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐tor's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist), ESP® (Elec-tronic Stability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assistare temporarily unavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the !, ÷ and å warning lamps may light upin the instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph(20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are notavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.The !, ÷, å and$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only)warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.

236 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsThe steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐tor's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarilyunavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 237

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailabledue to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

T!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, BAS, ESP®, theHOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a mal-function.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.A warning tone sounds.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps may light upin the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

238 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐tion to Releasethe Parking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamplights up.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-tion was switched off.X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please ReleaseParking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automaticrelease of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 173).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 173).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 173).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lampcontinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 364).X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten sec-onds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released.It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 173).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

240 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USAonly) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible toapply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the selector lever to P, as the electric parking brake is notapplied automatically.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake Inop‐erative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten sec-onds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released.It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parkingbrake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USAonly) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 241

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.A warning tone sounds. The$ (USA only) orJ (Canadaonly) warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake PadWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-tioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusCurrently Unavail‐able See Opera‐tor's Manual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not opera-tional.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Restart the engine.

242 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusInoperative

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperativedue to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Radar SensorsDirty See Opera‐tor's Manual

At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys-tems is temporarily restricted or inoperative:RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRDISTRONIC PLUSPossible causes are:Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirtyRthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety systemis impaired due to heavy rain or snow.

A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears. All driving systems and driving safety systemsare operative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 317):Rin the radiator trimRin the front bumperRin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rearbumper

X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

6SRS MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lightsup in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the restraint system, see(Y page 42).

Display messages 243

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or FrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left orright. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required

The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunc-tioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService Requiredor Right Side Cur‐tain Airbag Mal‐function ServiceRequired

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-tain air bag. The6warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-gered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

244 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front PassengerAirbag DisabledSee Operator's Man‐ual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag aredeactivated during the journey, although:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passengerseat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bagmay not be triggered in the event of an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFand PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light upsimultaneously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then lightup and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lampis on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled thefront-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag(Y page 51)Rthe Front Passenger Air Bag Enabled See Opera‐tor's Manual or Front Passenger Air Bag DisabledSee Operator's Manual display messages must not beshown in the multifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON

Display messages 245

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutionsindicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas-sifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 51).

Front PassengerAirbag Enabled SeeOperator's Manual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag areenabled during the journey, even though:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bagmay be triggered unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:

246 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsSeat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFand PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light upsimultaneously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then lightup and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lampis on, OCS has deactivated the front-passenger front air bagand front-passenger knee bag (Y page 51)Rthe Front Passenger Air Bag Enabled See Opera‐tor's Manual or Front Passenger Air Bag DisabledSee Operator's Manual display messages must not beshown in the multifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ONindicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas-sifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 51).

Lightsi Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in thelamp have failed.

Display messages 247

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bCheck Left Corner‐ing Light or CheckRight CorneringLight

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 121).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left LowBeam or CheckRight Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 121).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 121).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftTurn Signal orCheck Front RightTurn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 121).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorTurn Signal orCheck Right MirrorTurn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Center BrakeLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left BrakeLamp or CheckRight Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 121).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

248 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bCheck Left HighBeam or CheckRight High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 121).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left FogLamporCheck RightFog Lamp

The left or right-hand fog lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bRear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 121).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftParking Lamp orCheck Front RightParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 121).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bBackup Light

The backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 121).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailLamp or CheckRight Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 249

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightSidemarker Lamp

The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftSidemarker Lamp orCheck Rear RightSidemarker Lamp

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left DaytimeRunning Light orCheck Right Day‐time Running Light

The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 121).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive HeadlampsInoperative

The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to theà position.

bSwitch On Headlamps

You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.X Turn the light switch to the L orà position.

250 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

+Check CoolantLevel See Opera‐tor's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 311).

If you have to add coolant frequently:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the enginecooling system checked.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-wise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.If the temperature increases again:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Display messages 251

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

#See Operator's Man‐ual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge levelis too low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Observe the instructions in the display message# SeeOperator's Manual.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine OilAt Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 310).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 310).If the engine oil needs topping up more often:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the enginechecked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

æFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

252 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ç There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

æGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÀAttention Assist:Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÃInoperative

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunc-tion.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 193).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function(Y page 193).

Display messages 253

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Lane KeepingAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Clean the windshield.

Lane KeepingAssist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot AssistCurrently Unavail‐able See Opera‐tor's Manual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistInoperative

Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

254 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Park Assist Can‐celed

The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not beenfastened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and thedriver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheelwhile steering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 203).

Park Assist Inoper‐ative

You have just carried out a large number of turning or parkingmaneuvers.Active Parking Assist will become available again after approx-imately ten minutes (Y page 203).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Fin‐ished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 186).If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS NowAvailable

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 186).

Display messages 255

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUSInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Adaptive Brake Assist may alsohave failed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐pended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 186).

256 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Cruise ControlInoperative

Cruise control is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control- - - mph

RA condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

orX Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 184).orX Reactivate ESP® (Y page 227).

Display messages 257

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Tire Pres‐sure Soon

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal-led new wheels and tires.Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 322).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres-sure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tirepressure is correct (Y page 347).

Check Tire Pres‐sure Then RestartRun Flat Indicator

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-sage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 347).

Run Flat IndicatorInoperative

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

258 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Please CorrectTire Pressure

USA only:The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 348).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 350).

Check Tires USA only:The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position appears in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 322).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 348).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Display messages 259

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Warning Tire Mal‐function

USA only:The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position appears in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 322).

Tire Press. Moni‐tor CurrentlyUnavailable

USA only:Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tirepressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing

USA only:There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐itor InoperativeNo Wheel Sensors

USA only:The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Tire Press. Moni‐tor Inoperative

USA only:The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

260 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Depress Brake toStart Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P orN, Depress Brakeand Start Engine

You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or Dwithout starting the engine.X Start the engine.X Depress the brake pedal.

i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P tothe desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only thencan the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress thebrake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still bemoved but theparking lock remains engaged.

i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4‡ (Ò20†) you canonly shift out of position P into another transmission positionwhen the engine is running.

Apply Brake toShift from 'P'

You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R,N or Dwithout depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Transmission Notin P Risk of Vehi‐cle Rolling Away

The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmissionis in position R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Close the driver's door completely.

Display messages 261

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Service RequiredDo Not Shift GearsVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle isStationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Reversing Not Pos‐sible ServiceRequired

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot backup.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐function

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐function Stop

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Stop Vehicle Shiftto 'P' LeaveEngine Running

The automatic transmission has overheated.X Drive on carefully.The automatic transmission is available again when the displaymessage goes out.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and thedisplay message has disappeared.

262 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longerbeing charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switchoff the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Trans. Oil Overhea‐ted Drive on withCare

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated.Manual drive programM and the temporarily active manual driveprogram are no longer available. The engine power output isreduced.X Allow the vehicle to cool down.

4matic CurrentlyUnavailable

4MATIC has overheated. The vehicle is only driven by the frontwheels.X Drive on.The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly.When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available againand the vehicle is driven by all four wheels.

4matic Inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the frontwheels.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

A The tailgate is open.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicleinterior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the tailgate.

? The hood is open.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Close the hood.

Display messages 263

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

ÐPower Steering Mal‐function See Oper‐ator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.If you are able to steer safely:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If you are unable to steer safely:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 311).

Wiper Malfunction‐ing

The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard WarningFlashers Malfunc‐tioning

The hazard warning lamps are faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

264 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÂKey Does NotBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged.X Change the battery (Y page 80).

ÂDon't Forget YourKey

The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds andis only a reminder.You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock.X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not Detected(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Locate the SmartKey.

A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into keymode.

Display messages 265

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÂKey Not Detected(white display mes-sage)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂRemove 'Start' But‐ton and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-ing tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, someindicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash afterstarting the engine or whilst driving.

Safety

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, a warn-ing tone sounds for upto 6 seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).The warning tone ceases.

266 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up afterthe engine starts, assoon as the driver's orthe front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp flashes and anintermittent audiblewarning sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thevehicle is being driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 267

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

J

The yellow brake sys-tem warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

The brake system is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe braking characteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Drive on taking extra care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking char-acteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-function.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

268 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-tion. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the HOLD func-tion and hill start assist are also deactivated, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-mission, will not be available.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 269

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution), the HOLD function and hill start assist are also deactiva-ted, for example.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

270 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISION PREVEN-TION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assistfor example, are also not available.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)! ÷ å

The red brake systemwarning lamp and theyellow ABS, ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while thedrive system is running.

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, the HOLD function and hill startassist for example, are also not available.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 271

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

÷

The yellow ESP® warn-ing lamp flashes whilethe vehicle is in motion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 70) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 69).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated. ESP®will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts toskid or if a wheel starts to spin.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restric-ted.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 70) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 69).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP®checked.

M

Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles only:The yellow SPORT han-dling mode warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with theconditions described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" sec-tion (Y page 70).

272 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

÷ å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, the HOLDfunction and hill start assist are not available due to amalfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷ å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarilyunavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 273

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F (USA only)! (Canada only)The red indicator lampfor the electric parkingbrake flashes or lightsup and/or the yellowwarning lamp for theelectric parking brakelights up.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

6

The red restraint sys-tem warning lamp is litwhile the engine is run-ning.

The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraintsystem checked.

For further information about the restraint system, see(Y page 42).

274 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the enginemay bein emergency mode.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamplights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in thesestates. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply inthe state in which you are currently driving.

æ

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine is run-ning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

æ

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.In addition, the;Check Engine warninglamp may light up.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work-shop.

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe engine is runningand the coolant tem-perature gage is at thestart of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defec-tive.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 275

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning.

The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormaybe blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc-tioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 311).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine coolingsystem checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature isbelow248‡ (120†). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air-flow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the coolant levelmaybe too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).

276 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsX Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 311).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine coolingsystem checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

·

The red distance warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion.A warning tone alsosounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.

For further information about the distance warning function ofCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 66).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 277

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 171).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 322).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 348).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

278 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Useful information ............................ 280Loading guidelines ............................ 280Stowage areas ................................... 281Features ............................................. 288

279

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow

these components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-cle are dependent on the distribution of theload within the vehicle. For this reason, youshould observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle mass or the gross axle weightrating for the vehicle (including occupants).The values are specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar of thedriver's door.RThe cargo compartment is the preferredplace to carry objects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the cargo com-partment as possible.RThe load must not protrude above theupper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear orfront seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteningmaterials appropriate for the weight andsize of the load.RThemaximum load capacity of the stowagewell under the cargo compartment floor is55 lbs (25 kg).RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edgesfor protection.

! Do not position the load on one part of thefolding cargo compartment floor only. Themaximum load capacity of the folding cargocompartment floor is 220 lbs (100 kg). Dis-tribute theweight evenly to avoid damagingthe cargo compartment floor. Place a solidboard under the load if necessary. Please

280 Loading guidelinesStow

ageandfeatures

note that the load on the cargo compart-ment floor will be increased when the loadis lashed down.

Stowage areas

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 280).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

There is a pen holder at the top of the glovebox flap.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.Make sure that the eyeglasses compartmentis always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Stowage compartment in the front centerconsole

X To open: press the marking on cover:.i Depending on the vehicle equipment,there may be an ashtray in the center con-sole instead of a storage compartment.

Stowage areas 281

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment in front of the arm-rest (vehicles with automatic transmis-sion)

X To open: press the marking on cover:.

i You can remove the non-slip mat and theinsert for cleaning. When removing theinsert you will have to overcome someslight resistance.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: on vehicles with movable armr-ests, make sure that the armrest is in therearmost position.

X Press button: and fold the armrest up.Depending on the vehicle equipment, thearmrest can bemoved backwards or forwardsin a longitudinal direction.Depending on the vehicle's equipment, thefollowing may be in the stowage compart-ment: amultimedia connector unit with an SDcard slot and 2 USB ports, e.g. for use with aniPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player; see the sepa-rate operating instructions.

Stowage compartment under the driver'sseat and front-passenger seatG WARNINGIf you exceed the maximum load for the stow-age compartment, the cover may not be ableto restrain the items. Itemsmay be thrown outof the stowage compartment and hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Never exceed the maximum permissible loadfor the stowage compartment. Stow andsecure heavy objects in the cargo compart-ment.

The maximum permissible load of the stow-age compartment is 2.6 lbs (1.5 kg).

X To open: pull handle: up and foldcover; forwards.

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear centerconsole

282 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

X To open: pull down the top of stowagecompartment: by the edge of the handle.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,theremay be an open stowage space abovethe stowage compartment.

Parcel netsParcel nets are located:Rin the front-passenger footwellRon the back of the driver's and the front-passenger seatRon the left and right-hand side in the cargocompartment

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 280)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 281).

Folding backrest on the front-passenger seat

G WARNINGIf the backrest of the front-passenger seat isfolded forward, rear seat passengers cancome in contact with parts of the seat mech-anism. particularly in the event of an accident,heavy braking or a sudden change of direc-tion. There is a risk of injury.If a passenger travels in the vehicle while thefront-passenger seat is folded forward, theymust sit in the rear seat behind the driver.

The backrest of the front-passenger seat canbe folded forwards to increase the cargo com-partment capacity.Once you no longer need the backrest on thefront-passenger side to be used as a load sur-face, fold the backrest back into place.

X To fold forward: gently push the backrestback.

X Pull release handle: and fold the back-rest fully onto the seat cushion until itengages.

X To fold back: gently push the backrestdown and pull release handle:.

X Fold the seat backrest back until itengages.

Through-loading facility in the rear

X To open: fold down seat armrest:.X Pull the center head restraint on the rearbench seat into the uppermost position(Y page 105).

Stowage areas 283

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Slide locking mechanism= in the direc-tion of the arrow.

X Swing flap; fully to the side.Flap; is held open by a magnet.

X To close: swing flap; in the cargo com-partment back until it engages.

X Fold armrest: up fully if necessary.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 280).

Cargo compartment enlargement

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-partment cannot be restrained by the seatbackrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

! Before folding the backrest in the rearcompartment forwards, make sure that the

rear compartment armrest and thecupholder are folded in. They may other-wise be damaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 280).The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-ests can be folded forwards separately toincrease the cargo compartment capacity.

Folding the rear seat backrest forwardsand back

Folding the rear seat backrests forward

X Fully insert the backrest head restraints ifnecessary (Y page 106).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Pull left-hand or right-hand release han-dle; of the seat backrest forwards.Corresponding seat backrest: isreleased.

X Fold backrest: forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

284 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

X Insert the seat belt into seat-belt holder:.

Folding the rear seat backrest back! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Fold seat backrest: back until it engages.Red lock status indicator; is no longervisible.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 106).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backr-ests (cargo position)

Vehicles with the cargo compartment pack-age: to enlarge the cargo compartment, youcan adjust the rear seat backrests to a 15°steeper angle (cargo position).X Fold the seat backrest forward(Y page 284).

X Move handle: in the direction of thearrow.

X Push back seat backrest; as far as han-dle: until the backrest engages.The backrest is now in the cargo position.

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down rings

General notesObserve the following notes on securingloads:RObserve the loading guidelines(Y page 280).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Cargo compartment

: Cargo tie-down rings

Stowage areas 285

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-gage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear amaximum load of6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used tosecure a load.

: Bag hook

Parcel shelf! The maximum load which may be placedon the parcel shelf is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).

X To remove: detach straps: from the tail-gate.

X Fold the parcel shelf downwards.

X Pull the parcel shelf out to the rear;.X To install: place the parcel shelf on theguide rails on the left and right.

X Push the parcel shelf evenly forwards usingboth hands until it engages.

X Fold the parcel shelf up.X Attach straps: to the tailgate.

Cargo net

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo net cannot secure orrestrain heavy objects, items of luggage andheavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecuredload during sudden changes in direction,braking or in the event of an accident. There isan increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo net.

It is important to use a cargo net if you loadthe vehicle with small objects above the seatbackrests. For safety reasons, always use acargo net when transporting loads.Damaged cargo nets can no longer fulfill theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Attaching and tightening the cargo netYou have two options for hooking in the cargonet:Rwith cargo compartment enlargement: thebrackets are behind the B‑pillar and thecargo tie-down rings to tension the net areon the sides of the rear-compartment foot-well.Rwithout cargo compartment enlargement:the brackets are behind the C-pillar and thecargo tie-down rings to tension the net arein the cargo compartment (Y page 285).

286 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

The cargo net is located in the stowage spaceunder the cargo compartment floor(Y page 287).X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove thecargo net.

X Unroll and unfold the cargo net.The joints on the upper and lower guide rodshould engage audibly.

Cargo net (with cargo compartment enlargement)

Cargo net (without cargo compartment enlarge-ment)X To attach and tighten: insert guide rod:into bracket;.

X Attach belt hook? to the cargo tie-downring and pull down on the loose end of thelashing strap until the cargo net is taut.

X After driving a short distance, check thetension of the cargo net and retighten it ifnecessary.

X To loosen and detach: pull belt clamp=up to reduce the tension in the lashingstrap.

X Unhook belt hook? from the cargo tie-down ring.

X Detach guide rod: from bracket;.X To stow: press the red button on the upperand lower guide rod.

X Fold the cargo net and roll it up.X Close the twoVelcro fasteners on the cargonet holder.

Stowage well under the cargo com-partment floor

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you drivewhen the cargo compartment flooris open, objects could be flung around, thusstriking vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.Always close the cargo compartment floorbefore a journey.

! The maximum load capacity of the stow-age well under the cargo compartmentfloor is 55 lbs (25 kg).

There is a stowage area for TIREFIT, the vehi-cle tool kit, a folding box, etc. underneath thecargo compartment floor.

Opening/closing the cargo compart-ment floor

X To open: open the tailgate.X Holding ribbing;, press handle: down-wards.Handle: folds up.

Stowage areas 287

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Using handle:, swing the cargo compart-ment floor upwards as far as side flaps=,then overcome the resistance of flaps=.

X Place the cargo compartment floor on sideflaps=.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-cle.Position the load on the roof rack in such away that the vehicle will not sustain dam-age even when it is in motion.Ensure that, depending on the vehicle'sequipment, you can raise the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel fully andopen the tailgate fully when the roof carrieris installed.

Youwill find information on themaximum roofload in the "Technical data" section(Y page 383).An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roofload may become detached from the vehicle.You must therefore ensure that you observethe roof carrier manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails. Indoing so, observe the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe cup holder cannot hold a container securewhilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilsttraveling, the container may be flung aroundand liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-pants may come into contact with the liquidand if it is hot, they may be scalded. You maybe distracted from the traffic conditions andyou could lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident and injury.Only use the cup holder when the vehicle isstationary. Only use the cup holder for con-tainers of the right size. Always close the con-tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.

288 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 280).The stowage compartments in the doors pro-vide space for bottles:Rfront: capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l)Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l)

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

The cup holder and the rubber mat under-neath can be removed for cleaning. Cleanthem with clean, lukewarm water only.X To remove: carefully pull in upper sectionsof cup holder: on the driver's and front-passenger sides until they release.

X Lift the cup holder upwards; until it canbe removed.

X To install: insert cup holder into lateralcurved sections; in the stowage com-partment. Insert the cup holder so that thewedge of the upper section of cupholder: faces forwards.

X Press the cup holder downwards until itengages on the right and left-hand sides.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press the front of cup holder:or;.Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; backuntil it engages.

Features 289

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; andmirror coverAhas been folded up.

Glare from the sideX Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: out of bracket;.X Swing sun visor: to the side.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the

ashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise, thestowage space could be damaged.

X Vehicles with a stowage compartmentcover: press the lower section of cover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X To remove the insert: lift insert= up;and out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert=into the holder until it engages.

i If you remove the ashtray insert, you canuse the resulting compartment for stow-age.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: pull cover= out by its top edge.X To remove: pull insert; by recess: inthe direction of arrow? until it audiblyreleases.

X Lift insert; up and out.X To install the insert: install insert; fromabove into the holder and press down untilit engages.

290 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditions per-mit.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Vehicles with a stowage compartmentcover: press the lower section of cover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-ries include such items as chargers formobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to thesockets is automatically cut. This ensuresthat there is sufficient power to start theengine.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

X Vehicles with a stowage compartmentcover: press the lower section of cover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.

Features 291

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Pull cover: out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket;.

Socket in the cargo compartment

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

mbrace

General notesYou must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To log in,press the ï MB Info call button. If any ofthe steps mentioned are not carried out, thesystem may not be activated.

If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with theservice, a user ID and passwordwill be sent toyou by post.USA only: you can use this password to logonto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe correspondingmobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the volume controller of the audio sys-tem/COMAND.

The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

292 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detec-ted if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diag-nosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop‐erative or Service Not Activatedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the systemmay not operate as expec-ted. In the event of an emergency, help willhave to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

You must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To reg-ister, press the ï MB Info call button. Ifany of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

General notesAnemergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.

Features 293

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

As soon as the emergency call has been ini-tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The multifunction display shows theConnecting Call message.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-mined by the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been ini-tiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Customer Assis-tance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter attempts to getmore information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the systemhas been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-tinuously.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call is conclu-ded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

i If the mobile phone network is unavaila-ble, mbrace will not be able to make theemergency call. If you leave the vehicleimmediately after pressing the SOS button,you will not know whether mbrace placedthe emergency call. In this case, alwayssummon assistance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.

294 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active.The multifunction display shows the Con‐necting Callmessage. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 298).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.Further details are available in your mbracemanual.

i The system has not been able to initiate aRoadside Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-tance call button: is flashing continu-ously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp inMB Info call button:flasheswhile the connection is beingmade.The multifunction display shows the Con‐necting Callmessage. The audio systemis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenu

Features 295

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The system has not been able to initiatean MB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but-ton: is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-gency call will take priority and override allother active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.

All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steer-ing wheelRthe corresponding button on the audio sys-tem or on COMAND for ending a telephonecall

i When a call is initiated, the audio systemis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, do so onlywhen the vehicle is stationary and in a safelocation.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you accessto a database with over 15 million points ofinterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor-tant destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to 20 way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.

i If you select No, the address can be savedin the address book.

i The destination download function isavailable if the relevant mobile phone net-work is available and data transfer is pos-sible.

i The destination download function canonly be used if the vehicle is equipped witha navigation system.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-age and cannot be purchased separately.

296 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through the cur-rent route section.

Search & Send

General notesi To use "Search & Send", your vehiclemust be equipped with mbrace and a navi-gation system. Additionally, anmbrace ser-vice subscription must be completed.

"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-vice. A destination address which is found onGoogle Maps® can be transferred via mbracedirectly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://www.maps.google.com and enter a desti-nation address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to thee-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on thewebsite.i Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specifiedwhen setting up your mbrace account intothe corresponding field.

X Click "Send".

i Information on specific commands suchas "Address entry" or "Send" can be foundon the website.

Calling up destination addressesX Switch on the ignition.The destination address is loaded into thevehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.

X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVYthe COMAND controller and pressW toconfirm.The system calculates the route and sub-sequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select No, the address can be savedin the address book.

i If you have sent more than one destina-tion address, each individual destinationmust be confirmed separately.

i Destination addresses are loaded in thesame order as the order in which they weresent.If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles with mbrace and activated mbraceaccounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination willbe sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlock-ingmay be delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:

Features 297

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe correspondingmobile phone network isaccessible.

Vehicle remote closingThe valet locking feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, remote closingmaybe delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After 30 daysthe vehicle can no longer be locked remotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter contacts you and the local law enforce-ment agency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto-matically notified.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problemswith your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center. The customerservice representative can use the receiveddata to decide what kind of assistance isrequired. You are then, for example, guided tothe nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter or a recovery vehicle is called.

298 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer AssistanceCenter. You will see the Roadside Assis‐tance Connected message in the COMANDdisplay. If the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis can be started, the Request forvehicle diagnosis received. Startvehicle diagnosis? message appears inthe display.X Confirm the message with Yes.X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Pleasestart ignition message appears, turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 149).

X When the Please follow the instruc‐tions received by phone and moveyour vehicle to a safe positionmessage appears, follow the customer ser-vice representative's instructions.The message in the display disappears.If you select Cancel the remote malfunc-tion diagnosis is canceled completely.The vehicle operating state check begins.You will see the Vehicle diagnosisactivated message.

When the diagnosis is completed, the Trans‐fer vehicle diagnostics data (Voiceconnection may be interrupted dur‐ing data transfer)message appears. Thevehicle data can now be sent to the CustomerAssistance center.X Press OK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.You will see the Vehicle diagnosis:Transferring data... message.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice con-nection is re-established after the transfer iscomplete. If necessary, you will be contactedat a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.

Another function of the Vehicle Health Checkis the transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance Center. If a service is overdue, theCOMAND display shows a message aboutvarious special offers at your workshop.USA only: this information can also be calledup under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 24).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet.Each route can include up to 20 way points.Once a route has been received by the navi-gation system, you will see the <routename> has been saved to memory card.Do you want to start route guidance?message in the COMANDdisplay. The route issaved to the SD memory card.X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.i If you select No, the saved route can becalled up later via the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND.You can find further information in the sep-arate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Features 299

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-cle, a message will be sent to the CustomerAssistance Center. The Customer AssistanceCenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which was excee-ded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-daries of the selected areas. You can selectthe way in which you receive this informationbeforehand. Possible options include textmessage, e-mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areas simultane-ously. Different settings are possible for eacharea.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer service representa-tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehi-cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-ted in the rear-viewmirror allows you to oper-ate up to three different door and gate sys-tems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operatinginstructions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener,park the vehicle outside the garage. Do notrun the engine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integratedgarage door opener, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (freeof charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also available onlineat http://www.homelink.com.

300 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 25).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programing buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 301).

Garage door remote controlA is not inclu-ded with the integrated garage door opener.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use tocontrol the garage door drive.

X To start programing mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the inte-grated garage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ing mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programed for thefirst time. If the selected button has alreadybeen programed, indicator lamp: willonly light up yellow after ten seconds haveelapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towardsbuttons; to? on the rear-view mirror ata distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programing is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-graming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code (Y page 302).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Features 301

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 301).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror. To do this youwill need to use the programing button on thecontrol panel of the door drive. The program-ing button may be positioned in different pla-ces depending on the manufacturer. It is usu-ally located on the door drive unit on thegarage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage doordrive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-graming of additional remote controls",before carrying out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or gate opener drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programing button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-tiate the next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openerrepeatedly until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programing the remote controlCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprograming. Comparable with Canadian law,someU.S. garage door openers also feature a"break".

Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programing thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programing steps.

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programing is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-graming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA ofthe garage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-viewmirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote con-trolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Problems when programingIf you experience problems programing theintegrated garage door opener on the rear-viewmirror, take note of the following instruc-tions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA and

302 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

whether it is supported. The transmitterfrequency can usually be found on the backof the garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units whichoperate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases the like-lihood that garage door remote controlAwill transmit a strong and precise signal tothe integrated garage door opener.RWhen programing, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles from thebutton which you are programing. Try vari-ous angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control is available for thesame garage door drive, repeat the sameprograming steps with this remote control.Before performing these steps, make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only trans-mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-cator lamp on the remote control goes out).Press buttonB on remote controlA againbefore transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener assumes the function ofthe garage door system's remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press button;,= or? that has beenprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.

Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. The trans-mission is halted after a maximum of tenseconds and indicator lamp: lights upyellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if neces-sary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before sellingthe vehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Compass

Calling up the compass

: Rear-view mirror; Compass display= OpeningThe compass displays in which compassdirection the vehicle is currently traveling: N,NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.

Features 303

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

To receive a correct compass display reading,the magnetic field zone must be set and thecompass calibrated.

Setting the compassX Set your location using the magnetic fieldzone maps (Y page 304).

X Push a round pen into opening= forapproximately three seconds.The magnetic field zone currently selectedappears in compass display;.

X To select themagnetic field zone: push around pen into opening= until the desiredmagnetic field zone is selected.If, after a few seconds, the display in com-pass display; changes direction, themagnetic field zone has been selected.

Calibrating the compass

NotesIn order to calibrate the compass correctly,do the following:Rcalibrate the compass in the open and notin the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage transmission lines.Rswitch off electrical consumers such as theclimate control, windshield wipers or rearwindow defroster.Rclose all doors and the tailgate.

CalibratingX Make sure that there is sufficient space foryou to drive in a circle without impedingtraffic.

X Switch on the ignition.X Push a round pen into opening= forapproximately six seconds, until symbol Cis shown in compass display;.

X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx-imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph(10 km/h).When the calibration has been successfullycompleted, the current direction is shownin compass display;.

Magnetic field zone maps

North America

South America

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enter

304 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

the driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in the foot-well.

X Press safety catch knobs: onto retain-ers;.

X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Features 305

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

306

Useful information ............................ 308Engine compartment ........................ 308ASSYST PLUS .................................... 312Care .................................................... 313

307

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

308 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap between the hood andthe radiator trim and press hood catchlever; to the left.

X Raise the hood.

X Pull support strut? out of bracketA.X Lift up support strut? and insert it intoyellow retaining clip=.

Closing the hoodX Raise the hood slightly and, at the sametime, remove support strut? from yellowretaining clip=.

X Swing support strut? down and press itinto bracketA until it engages.

X Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Do not press the hoodclosed. Open the hood again and close itwith a little more force.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumptionmay be higher than this when the vehicle isnew or if you frequently drive at high enginespeeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Engine compartment 309

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark=or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engineoil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with a ser-vice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

310 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below theMINmark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-stick (Y page 310).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 379).

Checking and adding other serviceproducts

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.

! The coolantmay only be checked and cor-rected when the engine is cool (coolanttemperature below 104 ‡ (40 †). Check-ing the coolant when the coolant tempera-ture is above 104 ‡ (40 †) may result indamage to the engine or to the engine cool-ing system.

ExampleX Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehi-cle is on a level surface and the engine hascooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below104 ‡ (40 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Slowly turn cap: counter-clockwise andto relieve excess pressure.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level ofmarker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 381).

Windshield washer system

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Engine compartment 311

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-ommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction display prompt-ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 264).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 382).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messageThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.You can find information on the type of ser-vice and service intervals in the MaintenanceBooklet.

You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 309).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysRService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, indicates the typeof service. A stands for a minor service and Bfor a major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery is disconnec-ted.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display before discon-necting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press theaor%button on the steer-ing wheel.

312 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance

andcare

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the= or; button to select theServ. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing thea button.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display

! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-play has been inadvertently reset, this set-ting can be corrected at a qualified special-ist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-erwise lead to increased wear and damageto the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle, mainte-nance work must be carried out more fre-quently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distances

Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-ods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.

Driving abroadAnextensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, you

Care 313

Maintenance

andcare

Z

should drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatic transmis-sion is in position N when washing yourvehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi-cle could be damaged if the transmission isin another position.

! Make sure that:

Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off(the OFF button has been pressed/theairflow control is set to position 0).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-shield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each coun-try.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

314 CareMaintenance

andcare

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

! Edition 1 special model: parts of yourvehicle are covered with a decorative foil.Maintain a distance of at least 70 cmbetween the foil-wrapped parts of the vehi-cle and the nozzle of the high pressurecleaner.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This is the case approximately every three tofive months, depending on the climate con-ditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or ifthe paint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Care 315

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork withunsuitable materialsRfrequent use of automatic car washesRwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.The vehicle should preferably be washed byhand using a soft sponge, car shampoo andplenty of water.Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of approved Mercedes-Benzcare products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-

nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of thewindows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-

316 CareMaintenance

andcare

ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlightswith awet sponge and amild cleaningagent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a dis-tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Care 317

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Opening the camera cover for cleaningwithAudio 20 or COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions.

X To clean the rear view camera: use clearwater and a soft cloth to clean cameralens:.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as bathroomcleaner or wheel cleaner.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with blackexhaust pipes: the black-chrome tailpipefinishers should not be polished with achrome polish. They will otherwise losetheir black sheen. For optimal care, thefaceplates should be rubbed with a lightly

oiled cloth after every car wash. Commer-cially available engine and care oils aresuitable for this.For heavier soiling, you can apply a finepaintwork polish with a microfiber cloth.Remove the excess polish residue after pol-ishing.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-ter and after washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth andTFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts may

318 CareMaintenance

andcare

come loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you

are unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not use a microfiber cloth to cleancovers made out of real leather, artificialleather or DINAMICA. If used often, thesecan damage the cover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensurethat the appearance and comfort of the cov-ers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Care 319

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with amicrofiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and alwayswipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaningresults depend on the type of dirt andhow long it has been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

320 CareMaintenance

andcare

Useful information ............................ 322Where will I find...? ........................... 322Flat tire .............................................. 322Battery (vehicle) ................................ 327Jump-starting .................................... 331Towing and tow-starting .................. 333Fuses .................................................. 337

321

Breakdow

nassistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesVehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit islocated in the stowage well under the cargocompartment floor.Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire-change tool kit is in the stowage well underthe cargo compartment floor.

i Apart from certain country-specific varia-tions, the vehicles are not equipped with atire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang-ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. Formore information on which tire changingtools are required and approved to performa wheel change on your vehicle, consult aqualified specialist workshop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Tire inflation compressor; Towing eye= Tire sealant filler bottleX Open the tailgate.X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards(Y page 287).

X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 324).

i Towing eye; is located under tire infla-tion compressor:.

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kitX Open the tailgate.X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards(Y page 287).

X Remove the tire-change tool kit.The tire-change tool kit contains:RJackRLug wrenchROne pair of glovesRFolding wheel chock

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat prop-erties) (Y page 323)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 322)

322 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.Information on changing and mountingwheels (Y page 363).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 171).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver'sdoor.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 149).

X Make sure that the engine cannot be star-ted via your smartphone (Y page 171).

X Make sure that the passengers are notendangered as they do so. Make sure thatno one is near the danger area while awheel is being changed. Anyone who is notdirectly assisting in the wheel changeshould, for example, stand behind the bar-rier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtiremust not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 357).MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor.If a pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the displaymes-sages (Y page 258).Rcheck the tire for damage.Rif driving on, observe the following notes.The driving distance possible in run-flat modeis approximately 50 miles (80 km) when thevehicle is partially laden. When the vehicle isfully laden it is approximately 19 miles(30 km).In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:Rvehicle speedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving condi-tions or maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The driving distance possible in run-flat modeis counted from themoment the tire pressureloss warning appears in the multifunction dis-play.

Flat tire 323

Breakdow

nassistance

You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).When replacing one or all tires, pleaseobserve the following specifications for yourvehicle's tires:RsizeRtype andRthe "MOExtended" markIf a tire has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith a MOExtended tire, a standard tire maybe used as a temporary measure. Make surethat you use the proper size and type (sum-mer or winter tire).Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

324 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-sor for longer than eight minutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safetyinstructions on the sticker on the tire inflationcompressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-tion compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the cargo compartment floor(Y page 322).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's fieldof vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull connector? with the cable and hoseA out of the tire inflation compressorhousing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire seal-ant bottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head down-wards into recess; of the tire inflationcompressor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.X Insert plug? into a 12 V socket in yourvehicle.Observe the notes on sockets(Y page 291).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press on and off switch= on the tire infla-tion compressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise to approx-imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximum of five minutes. The tire shouldthen have attained a pressure of at least180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure reached" (Y page 326).

Flat tire 325

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has not been attained after five minutes, see"Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 326).If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affec-ted areas as quickly as possible. Use plainwater if possible.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethylene ata dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.Note that tire sealantmay escapewhen youunscrew the filler hose.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverseapproximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tirepressuremust be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed

the specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tiresealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must beaffixed to the instrument cluster in the driv-er's field of vision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may comeout of the filler hose after use. This couldcause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentionedabove, contact an authorized Mercedes-

326 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-ada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depresspressure release buttonE next to pres-sure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrewthe filler hose from the valve of the sealedtire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve ofthe sealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tireinflation compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installation. You should there-fore have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 65) and (Y page 69).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.

Battery (vehicle) 327

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove thekey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,ensure that the ignition is switched off.Check that all the indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster are off. Otherwise,electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-tem may be damaged.Rin vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

328 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physi-cian if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehi-cle occupants from suffering acid burnsshould the battery be damaged in the event ofan accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-nected at a qualified specialist workshop. Youcan also charge the battery with a chargerrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a

qualified specialist workshop for further infor-mation.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.Only replace a battery with a battery that hasbeen recommended by Mercedes-Benz.Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicleand do not require any electrical consumers.The vehicle will then use very little energy,thus conserving battery power.If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g.if you reconnect the battery, you will have to:Rset the clock via Audio 20 or COMAND (seeseparate operating instructions).Rreset the function for folding the exteriormirrors in/out automatically, by folding themirrors out once (Y page 109).

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-

Battery (vehicle) 329

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 331).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donor bat-tery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 331).

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light upat low temperatures, it is very likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this caseyou may neither jump-start the vehicle norcharge the battery. The service life of athawed-out battery may be shorter. The start-ing characteristics can be impaired, particu-larly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.Only charge the installed battery with a bat-tery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. A batterycharger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved byMercedes-Benz is available as an accessory.It permits the charging of the battery in itsinstalled position. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for further informa-tion and availability. Read the battery charg-er's operating instructions before chargingthe battery.

330 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor chargethe battery. Let the battery thaw first. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter.The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have thethawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting 331

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables that are not damaged and have a sufficient cross-section and insu-lated terminal clamps.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rnon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal partswhile the jumper cables are connected to the battery.RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Press together cover: of positive clamp; and slide it back.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.

332 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then frompositive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables.X Close the hood.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicleweight of your vehicle can be found on thevehicle identification plate (Y page 376).

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto-matically in certain situations. To avoiddamage to the vehicle, deactivate thesesystems in the following or similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Towing and tow-starting 333

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

! Make sure that the electric parking brakeis released. If the electric parking brake isfaulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the front axle must beraised or the entire vehicle raised andtransported.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,use the key instead of the Start/Stop but-ton. Otherwise, the automatic transmissionmay shift to position P when the driver's orfront-passenger door are opened, whichcould lead to damage to the transmission.

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be started by tow-starting. Thiscould otherwise damage the transmission.

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed away.If the vehicle can no longer be driven becauseof an accident or breakdown, you have thefollowing options:RTransporting the vehicleAs a rule, you should have the vehicle trans-ported.RTowing the vehicle with a tow rope or towbarOnly tow the vehicle in exceptional cases.

The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot release the electric parking brakeRcannot shift the transmission to position NThe function of the electric parking brake andthe parking lock is dependent on the on-boardvoltage.If the on-board voltage is low or there is asystem malfunction, it is possible that:Rthe electric parking brake may not beapplied in certain circumstances, orRthe transmission may not be shifted to PSwitch off non-essential consumers, e.g. theradio.Disarm the automatic locking feature beforethe vehicle is towed (Y page 230). You couldotherwise be locked out when pushing ortowing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

The brackets for the screw-in towing eye arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the rearand at the front, under covers:.

334 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

X Remove the towing eye from the stowagespace.The towing eye is located with the vehicletool kit under the cargo compartment floor(Y page 322).Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towingeye is beneath the tire inflation compres-sor.

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Take cover: off the opening.X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to thestop.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the stowage wellbeneath the cargo compartment floor inthe cargo compartment (Y page 322).

X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back thetire inflation compressor.

Towing the vehicle with the front axleraisedObserve the important safety notes whentowing your vehicle with the front axle raised(Y page 333).Only vehicles without 4MATIC can betowed with the front axle raised.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towedaway with both axles on the ground or be loa-ded up and transported.

! The ignition must be switched off if thevehicle is being towed with the front axleraised. Otherwise, ESP®may intervene anddamage the brake system.

X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or theKEYLESS-GO start function: you mustuse the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 150).

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the automatic locking(Y page 230).

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 119).

X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 0 and leave the SmartKey in theignition lock.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 333).X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or theKEYLESS-GO start function: you mustuse the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 150).

The automatic transmission automaticallyshifts to positionPwhen you open the driver'sor front-passenger door or when you removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock. In orderto ensure that the automatic transmissionstays in position N when towing the vehicle,you must observe the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

Towing and tow-starting 335

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 119).

i In order to signal a change of directionwhen towing the vehicle with the hazardwarning lamps switched on, use the com-bination switch as usual. In this case, onlythe indicator lamps for the direction oftravel flash. After resetting the combina-tion switch, the hazard warning lamp startsflashing again.

Transporting the vehicle

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto-matic transmission

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport,the front and rear axles must be stationaryand on the same transportation vehicle.Positioning over the connection point of thetransport vehicle is not permitted. The drivetrain may otherwise be damaged.

All vehicles

! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as

axle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Shift the transmission to position N.As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may only either betowed away with both axles on the ground orbe loaded up and transported.If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rearaxle is damaged, have the vehicle transportedon a truck or trailer.In the event of damage to the electricalsystem:If the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission to positionN, you must provide power to the vehicle'selectrical system in the same way as whenjump-starting (Y page 331).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

336 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You could other-wise damage the automatic transmission.

i You can find information on "Jump-start-ing" under (Y page 331).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Only use fuses marked with an"S". Otherwise, components or systemscould be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.

Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 171).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver'sdoor.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellThe fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box inthe front-passenger footwell (Y page 338).

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

Fuses 337

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Open the hood.X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.

X To open: open clamps;.X Fold up cover: in the direction of thearrow and remove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is lyingcorrectly in cover:.

X Insert cover: at the back into openings= on the fuse box.

X Fold down cover:.X Hook clamps; into the fuse box andclose.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture

seeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X To open: open the front-passenger door.X Remove the floormat.X Fold out perforated floor covering: in thedirection of the arrow.

X To release cover=, press retainingclamp;.

X Fold out cover= in the direction of thearrow to the catch.

X Remove cover= forwards.Fuse allocation chart? is located on thelower right-hand side of cover=.

X To close: insert cover= on the left-handside of the fuse box into the retainer.Cover= engages in the retainers.

X Fold down cover= until clamps; lockaudibly.

X Fold back perforated floor covering:.X Install the floormats.

338 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

Useful information ............................ 340Important safety notes ..................... 340Operation ........................................... 340Winter operation ............................... 342Tire pressure ..................................... 343Loading the vehicle .......................... 351All about wheels and tires ............... 355Changing a wheel .............................. 363Wheel and tire combinations ........... 367

339

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the sizes and types of wheelsand tires for your vehicle can be found under"Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 367).Information on tire pressure can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 351)Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 170)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 343)

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteristics,e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate thatthe wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-pect that a tire is defective, reduce yourspeed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soonas possible to check the wheels and tires fordamage. Hidden tire damage could also becausing the unusual handling characteristics.If you find no signs of damage, have the tiresand wheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

340 OperationWheelsandtires

When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If they cannot be avoided,drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly andat an obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may dam-age the wheels or tires.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Check wheels and tires for damage at leastonce a month. Check wheels and tires afterdriving off-road or on rough roads. Damagedwheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Payparticular attention to damage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 341). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 343).

The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:Rdriving styleRtire pressureRdistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into thetire tread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once a tread depth of

Operation 341

Wheelsandtires

Z

approximatelyá in (1.6 mm) has beenreached. If this is the case, the tire is so wornthat it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe here the "MOExtended tires(tires with run-flat characteristics)" section(Y page 323).ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds forthe first 60miles (100 km). They only reachtheir full performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-est, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 323).Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may

be obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 363).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehi-cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at verycold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tires perma-nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), use win-ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-

342 Winter operationWheelsandtires

vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-ditions. Only these tires will allow drivingsafety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tires havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handling charac-teristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 343).X Restart the tire pressure loss warning sys-tem (Canada) (Y page 347) or restart thetire pressure monitor (USA) (Y page 350).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are mounted on the rearwheels, the snow chains could cause abrasionto the vehicle body or to chassis components.This could cause damage to the vehicle or thetires. There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever mount snow chains on the rearwheelsRonly mount snow chains in pairs on thefront wheels.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality. For more information,please contact a qualified specialist work-shop.

If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 367).ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-ble when you come to a road that is notsnow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).RWhen snow chains are installed, never useActive Parking Assist (Y page 203).

You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pull-ing away with snow chains installed(Y page 69). You can thereby allow thewheelsto spin in a controlled manner, achieving anincreased driving force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Tire pressure 343

Wheelsandtires

Z

Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The data on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard and tire pressure tableshown here are examples. Tire pressurespecifications are vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data shown here. The tirepressure specifications that are valid foryour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 351).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for

cold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for alltires permitted at the factory for this vehicle;see illustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-lowing tire pressure information is only validfor that tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fullyladen" are defined in the table for differentnumbers of occupants and amounts of lug-gage. The actual number of seats may differ.

344 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size andcan be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 357).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be reset tothe higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build-up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.Formore information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked in the on-boardcomputer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-ent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correctthe tire pressure if it is too low for the currentoperating conditions. If you check the tirepressure when the tires are warm, the result-ing value will be higher than if the tires werecold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire

Tire pressure 345

Wheelsandtires

Z

pressure to the value specified for cold tires.The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 170)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handling

Rwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the rec-ommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 343).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 343).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillarRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 170)Rin the "Tire pressure" section

346 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pres-sure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it tothe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard or the tirepressure table (Y page 343).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase thetire pressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air.To do so, press down the metal pin in thevalve, using the tip of a pen for example.Then check the tire pressure again usingthe tire pressure checker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tire pres-sure loss warning system monitors the settire pressure using the rotational speed of thewheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result of aloss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunction dis-play.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarn-ing by the Run Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to Restart message in themultifunction display in the Serv. menu.Information on the message display can befound in the "Restarting the tire pressure losswarning system" section (Y page 347).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 343).The tire pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tirepressure. An even loss of pressure on severaltires at the same time cannot be detected bythe tire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering movements.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-nering at high speeds or driving with highrates of acceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in thevehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tirepressure table is attached to the fuel fillerflap. The tire pressure loss warning systemcan only give reliable warnings if you have

Tire pressure 347

Wheelsandtires

Z

set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrecttire pressure is set, these incorrect valueswill be monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 343).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).

X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the Serv.menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to selectYes.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears, press the9 or: button toselect Cancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressuremonitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor thetire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-sure monitor warns you if the pressure dropsin one or more of the tires. The tire pressuremonitor only functions if the correspondingsensors are installed in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the Serv. menu of the multi-function display, see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-cally" section (Y page 350).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,

348 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunderinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-sure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the warning lampwill flash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-minated, the systemmay not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of incom-patible replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate Tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 343). Note that the correct tire pres-sure for the current operating situation mustfirst be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.If there is a substantial loss of pressure, thewarning threshold for the warning message is

aligned to the reference values taught-in.Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjust-ing the pressure of the cold tires(Y page 350). The current pressures aresaved as new reference values. As a result, awarning message will appear if the tire pres-sure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 343).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering movements.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-ing pressure loss or a malfunction. Whetherthe warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-cates whether a tire pressure is too low or thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires is signif-icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor isnot malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Observethe information on display messages(Y page 258).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunc-tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indica-ted. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tirepressure warning lamp flashing for approx-imately one minute and then remaining lit.When the malfunction has been rectified, thetire pressure warning lamp goes out after afew minutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.The tire pressures shown by the on-board

Tire pressure 349

Wheelsandtires

Z

computer refer to those measured at sealevel. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higherthan those shown by the on-board computer.In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radio trans-mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,two-way radios) that may be being operatedin or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).

X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the Serv.menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than20 minutes, the Tire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewminutes message is shown.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureMonitor Active message is shown insteadof the tire pressure display. The tire pressuresare already being monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display. The yel-low tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in the multifunction dis-play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is

too low. The tire pressure must be correc-ted when the opportunity arises.RIf the Check Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in one or more tires has drop-ped significantly. The tires must bechecked.RIf the Tire Pressure Warning TireFailure message appears in the multi-function display, the tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. The tiresmust be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 258).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rota-ted, the tire pressures may be displayed forthe wrong positions for a short time. This isrectified after a few minutes of driving, andthe tire pressures are displayed for the cor-rect positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressuremonitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as the refer-ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, thetire pressure monitor will automaticallydetect the new reference values after youhave changed the tire pressure. However, youcan also define reference values manually asdescribed here. The tire pressure monitorthen monitors the new tire pressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-mended for the corresponding driving sit-uation on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 343).You can find more tire pressure values forvarious operating conditions in the tirepressure table inside the fuel filler flap(Y page 170).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

350 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).

X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the cur-rent tire pressure for each tire or the Tirepressure will be displayed afterdriving a few minutes message.

X Press the: button.The multifunction display shows the UseCurrent Pressures as New ReferenceValues message.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximum permis-sible vehicle load. It also contains detailsof the tire sizes and corresponding pres-sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-pants, the fuel and the cargo. You canalso find information about themaximumgross axle weight rating on the front andrear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or the maxi-mum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

Loading the vehicle 351

Wheelsandtires

Z

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load and luggage must not exceed the speci-fied value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The maximum permis-sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in theillustration. You can find the validmaximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating foryour vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The number of seats isvehicle-specific and can differ from thedetails shown. The number of seats in yourvehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-ing Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.

352 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150-lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load capa-city calculated in step 4.

Loading the vehicle 353

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you areusing the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard (Y page 351).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

354 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load(maximum gross vehi-cleweight rating fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placardminus the grossweight of all occu-pants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 351).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, allpassengers, load and trailer load/noseweight(if applicable) must not exceed the permissi-ble gross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): themaximum permissible weight that can be car-ried by one axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (gross vehi-cle weight and maximum gross axle weightrating), have your loaded vehicle (includingdriver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load ifapplicable) weighed on a suitable vehicleweighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Their pur-pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-ble information on tire performance data. Tiremanufacturers have to grade tires using threeperformance factors:: treadwear grade,;traction grade and= temperature grade.These regulations do not apply to Canada.Nevertheless, all tires sold in North Americaare provided with the corresponding qualitygrading markings on the sidewall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applica-ble, on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-der and maximum section width.

All about wheels and tires 355

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, ser-vice practices and differences in road char-acteristics and climate.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfa-ces.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 341).Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further thanon surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 342).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level of performance whichall passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

356 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards(Y page 361)

; Department of Transportation, Tire Iden-tification Number (Y page 360)

= Maximum load rating (Y page 359)? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 346)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 360)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed rating (Y page 357)D Load index (Y page 359)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (sales designa-tion) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S. manu-facturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressurethat are only designed for temporary use in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Aspect ratio: aspect ratio; is the size ratiobetween the tire height and tire width and isshown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcu-

All about wheels and tires 357

Wheelsandtires

Z

lated by dividing the tire width by the tireheight.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diam-eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of therim flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexAis a numerical code that specifies the maxi-mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 351).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 359).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 359).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the traffic condi-tions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

Index Speed rating

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149mph (240 km/h)may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifica-tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order tofind out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. Theletter "Y" represents the speed rating. Themaximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR" and the service specifi-cationmust be given in parentheses. Exam-ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed ofthe tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Askthe tire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

358 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+S marking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the Rubber Manufac-turers Association (RMA) and the RubberAssociation of Canada (RAC) regarding thetire traction on snow. They have been espe-cially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph(210 km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-tory may be higher than the maximum speedthat the electronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 367).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed rating on the sidewall ofthe tire. Speed rating (Y page 357).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum per-missible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

All about wheels and tires 359

Wheelsandtires

Z

ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 351).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TINin or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retread-ers to inform purchasers of recalls and othersafety-relevant matters. It makes it possiblefor the purchaser to easily identify the affec-ted tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi-cation code;, tire size=, tire type code?and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: marks that the tire complies withthe requirements of the U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer identification code: manu-facturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 367).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.

Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers in sidewall:and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

360 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehi-cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. The qualitygrading assessment is made by the manufac-turer following specifications from the U.S.government. The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installedon the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identifica-tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich thetire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-ble. The gross vehicleweightmust not exceedthe gross vehicle weight rating GVWR asspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories, occu-pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-weight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressureis bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva-lent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-city more precisely.

All about wheels and tires 361

Wheelsandtires

Z

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standard equip-ment including themaximum capacity of fuel,oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-tioning system and optional equipment ifthese are installed in the vehicle, but does notinclude passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximum per-missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of the accesso-ries.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread islevel with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

362 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 322) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. Information ondriving with MOExtended tires in the event ofa flat tire can be found under "MOExtendedtires (tires with run-flat characteristics"(Y page 323).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 363).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern

has formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can rotate the wheelsaccording to the intervals in the tire manu-facturer's warranty book in your vehicle docu-ments. If no warranty book is available, thetires should be rotated every 3,000 to6,000miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Dependingon tire wear, this may be required earlier. Donot change the direction of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec-essary, restart the tire pressure loss warningsystem or the tire pressure monitor.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. These advantages can onlybe gained if the tires are installed correspond-ing to the direction of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.

Changing a wheel 363

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver'sdoor.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 149).

X Make sure that the engine cannot be star-ted via your smartphone (Y page 171).

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle.

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 171).

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 322).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsafety measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

X Place chocks or other suitable items underthe front and rear of the wheel that is diag-onally opposite the wheel you wish tochange.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising thevehicle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-cle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It must not be used forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.

364 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen-gage the parking brake while the vehicle israised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, flat, load-bearing underlay must beused. On a slippery surface, a non-slipunderlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RNever open or close a door or the tailgatewhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-pletely.

Jacking points

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of therear wheel housings (arrows).

X Take ratchet wrench? out of the vehicletool kit and place it on the hexagon nut ofjack= so that the letters AUF are visible.

X Position jack= at jacking point;.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

Changing a wheel 365

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Turn ratchet wrench? until jack= sitscompletely on jacking point; and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until the tire israised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from theground.

Removing a wheel

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-tion (Y page 363).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub andpush it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagonnut of the jack so that the letters AB arevisible.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle isonce again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

366 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:toA). The specified tightening torque is96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicletools in the vehicle again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 343).

When you are driving with the collapsiblespare wheel mounted, the tire pressure losswarning system or the tire pressure monitorcannot function reliably. Only restart the tirepressure loss warning system or tire pressuremonitor when the defective wheel has beenreplaced with a new wheel.Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-tem: all installed wheels must be equippedwith functioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle.

These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1=Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-sion variations could cause the tires tocome into contact with the bodywork andaxle components. This could result in dam-age to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than those tes-ted and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre-vious damage cannot always be detectedon retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety ifretreaded tires are mounted. Do not mountused tires if you have no information abouttheir previous usage.

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-ing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axle

Wheel and tire combinations 367

Wheelsandtires

Z

The recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 343).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-nance recommendations of the tire manufac-turer in the vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle(left and right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 323).

Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

i The following pages contain informationon approved wheel rims and tire sizes forequipping your vehicle with winter tires.Winter tires are not available at the factoryas standard equipment or optional extras.If you want to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, it may be necessaryto obtain wheel rims in the correspondingsize. The size of the approved winter tiresmay differ from the standard tires. This isdependent on the model and the equip-ment installed at the factory.

The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

368 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Tires

GLA 250

Summer tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 215/60 R17 96 V BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/50 R18 97 V2, 3 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 V2, 3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

All-weather tiresR 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/50 R18 97 H M+S2, 3 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 H M+S2, 3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended tires.3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 369

Wheelsandtires

Z

Winter tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 215/60 R17 96 H M+Si BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 215/55 R18 95 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

BA: 235/50 R18 97 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

GLA 250 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 215/60 R17 96 V BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/50 R18 97 V2, 3 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended tires.3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

370 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 V2, 3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

All-weather tiresR 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/50 R18 97 H M+S2, 3 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 H M+S2, 3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

Winter tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 215/60 R17 96 H M+Si BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 215/55 R18 95 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

BA: 235/50 R18 97 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended tires.3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 371

Wheelsandtires

Z

Mercedes-AMG GLA 45 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 ZR19 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.72 in (43.7 mm)

R 20

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/40 ZR20 96 Y XL3 BA: 8.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 215/55 R18 99 V XL M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.67 in (42.5 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 99 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.72 in (43.7 mm)

3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

372 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Useful information ............................ 374Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 374Vehicle electronics ........................... 374Identification plates ......................... 376Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 377Vehicle data ....................................... 383Vehicle data for off-road driving ...... 384

373

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Vehicle electronics

Retrofitting two-way radios andmobile phones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permitmay be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use ofRF transmitters are not observed.In particular, the following conditions mustbe complied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Rcompliance with the maximum permissi-ble output in these wavebands isrequired.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and thehealth of others. Using an exterior antennatakes into account current scientific discus-sions relating to the possible health hazardsthat may result from electromagnetic fields.

374 Vehicle electronicsTechnicaldata

Approved antenna positions: Front roof area; Rear roof area= Rear fender

i On vehicles with panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel, installing anantenna to the front or rear roof area is notpermitted.On the rear fenders, it is recommended toposition the antenna on the side of thevehicle closest to the center of the road.

Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters(Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installa-tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmit-ting equipment). Observe the legal require-ments for retrofittings.If your vehicle has installations for two-wayradio equipment, use the power supply orantenna connections intended for use withthe basic wiring. Be sure to observe the man-ufacturer's additional instructions wheninstalling.Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-mum transmission outputs or antenna posi-tions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) atthe base of the antenna must not exceed thefollowing values:

Waveband Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle with-out restrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmitter frequen-cies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and amaximum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio/Tetra)RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G)There is no restriction for antenna positionson the outside of the vehicle for the followingwavebands:RTrunked radio/TetraR70 cm wavebandR2G/3G/4G

Vehicle electronics 375

Technicaldata

Z

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-tion plate is used only as an example. Thisdata is different for every vehicle and candeviate from the data shown here. You canfind the data applicable to your vehicle onthe vehicle identification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-most position.

X Fold floor covering: upwards.You will see VIN;.

The VIN can also be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 376).The VIN can also be found at the lower edge ofthe windshield (Y page 377).

376 Identification platesTechnicaldata

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)= Engine number (stamped into the crank-

case)

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerant

Components and service products must bematched. Only use products recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is causedby the use of products which have not beenrecommended is not covered by theMercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill ges-tures. They are listed in this Mercedes-BenzOperator'sManual in the appropriate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tion on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.

Service products and filling capacities 377

Technicaldata

Z

You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capa-city

Models with 4MATIC 14.8 US gal(56.0 l)

All other models 13.2 US gal(50.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx.2.1 US gal(8.0 l)

All other models Approx.1.6 US gal(6.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter

the fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premiumgrade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-ble and you have to refuel with unleadedgasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-lowing precautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg-ular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff for assis-tance.

378 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

i For further information, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

GLA 250, GLA 250 4MATIC: as a temporarymeasure, if the recommended fuel is notavailable, you may also use regular unleadedgasoline with an octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON.All othermodels: as a temporary measure, ifthe recommended fuel is not available, youmay also use regular unleaded gasoline withan octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This mayreduce engine performance and increase fuelconsumption. Avoid driving at full throttle andsudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuelwith a lower AKI.Information on refueling (Y page 170).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additives recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply withthe instructions for use on the productlabel. More information about recommen-ded additives can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up in the injection system as a result. Insuch cases, and in consultation with anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-line may be mixed with the cleaning additiverecommended by Mercedes-Benz. You mustobserve the notes and mixing ratios specifiedon the container.

Fuel consumption information

H Environmental noteCO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-tists believe to be principally responsible forglobal warming (the greenhouse effect). Yourvehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related tofuel consumption and therefore depend on:Refficient use of the fuel by the engineRdriving styleRother non-technical factors, such as envi-ronmental influences, road conditions ortraffic flow

You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis-sions by driving carefully and having it serv-iced regularly.

The vehiclewill usemore fuel than usual in thefollowing situations:Rat very low outside temperaturesRin city trafficRon short journeysRin mountainous terrain

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary to ful-fill the prescribed service intervals. Do notchange the engine oil or oil filter in order toachieve longer replacement intervals thanthose prescribed. You could otherwisecause engine damage or damage to theexhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the service inter-val display regarding the oil change. Other-wise, you may damage the engine and theexhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 377).The engine oils are matched to the perform-ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service

Service products and filling capacities 379

Technicaldata

Z

intervals. You should therefore only useengine oils and oil filters that are approved forvehicles with maintenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model MB-Freigabeor MB-Approval

All models 229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-tainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

Mercedes‑AMG vehi-cles

5.8 US qt (5.5 l)

All other models 5.9 US qt (5.6 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry out reg-ular oil changes using an approved engine oilwith the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 377).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

380 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Complywith the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 377).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35‡ (-37†), the boiling point of the cool-ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends coolant or anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate inaccordance with MB Specifications for Ser-vice Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.

i The coolant is checked with every main-tenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

Approx. 12.6 US qt(11.9 l)

All other models Approx. 8.2 US qt(7.8 l)

Service products and filling capacities 381

Technicaldata

Z

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

When handling washer fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 377).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-Fit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to theinformation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R‑134a.

The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the left, on theunderside of the hood.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-wise, the climate control system may bedamaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate control sys-tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol: advises you about:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop

382 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

Capacity

Refrigerant 23.6 ± 0.4 oz(670 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

All other models Capacity

Refrigerant 22.9 ± 0.4 oz(650 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Model :

Maximumheadroom

;

Openingheight

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

73.5 in(1866 mm)

79.5 in(2019 mm)

All other mod-els

75.4 in(1914 mm)

82.0 in(2083 mm)

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

Vehicle length 175.0 in(4445 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

79.6 in(2022 mm)

Vehicle height 58.2 in(1479 mm)

Wheelbase 106.3 in(2699 mm)

Minimum groundclearance

6.1 in(155 mm)

Turning radius 38.7 ft(11.8 m)

Vehicle data 383

Technicaldata

Z

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

Maximum roofload

220.5 lb(100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220.5 lb(100 kg)

All other models

Vehicle length 173.9 in(4417 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

79.6 in(2022 mm)

Vehicle height 60.3 in(1532 mm)

Minimum groundclearance

8.0 in(204 mm)

Wheelbase 106.3 in(2699 mm)

Turning radius 38.7 ft(11.8 m)

Maximum roofload

165.3 lb(75 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220.5 lb(100 kg)

Vehicle data for off-road driving

Approach/departure angle

: ;

Approachand depar-ture angleswhen thevehicle isloaded andready todrive

19° 29°

When the vehicle is loaded and ready to drive,it has a full tank, all fluids have been refilledand the driver is in the vehicle.For further information about approach/departure angles, see (Y page 183).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-ityNote that the vehicle's gradient-climbingcapability depends on the off-road conditionsand the road surface conditions.GLA 250 4MATIC: the maximum gradientclimbing ability is 65%.Missing values for the GLA 250 andMercedes-AMGGLA 45 4MATICmodels wereunavailable at time of going to print.Accelerate carefully and make sure that thewheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-rain.

384 Vehicle data for off-road drivingTechnicaldata

If the load on the front axle is reduced whenpulling away on a steep uphill slope, the frontwheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recog-nizes this and brakes the wheels accordingly.The rear wheel torque is increased, making iteasier to drive off.For further information about the maximumgradient climbing ability, see (Y page 183).

Vehicle data for off-road driving 385

Technicaldata

Z

386

387

388